Citation |

- Permanent Link:
- https://ufdc.ufl.edu/UFE0022525/00001
## Material Information- Title:
- Microfluidic Mixing and Its Use in Lab-on-a-chip Devices
- Creator:
- Xia, Zheng
- Place of Publication:
- [Gainesville, Fla.]
- Publisher:
- University of Florida
- Publication Date:
- 2008
- Language:
- english
- Physical Description:
- 1 online resource (153 p.)
## Thesis/Dissertation Information- Degree:
- Doctorate ( Ph.D.)
- Degree Grantor:
- University of Florida
- Degree Disciplines:
- Mechanical Engineering
Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering - Committee Chair:
- Fan, Zhonghui H.
- Committee Co-Chair:
- Sheplak, Mark
- Committee Members:
- Cattafesta III, Louis N.
Mei, Renwei Narayanan, Ranganathan - Graduation Date:
- 8/9/2008
## Subjects- Subjects / Keywords:
- Amplitude ( jstor )
Electric fields ( jstor ) Electric potential ( jstor ) Flow velocity ( jstor ) Geometry ( jstor ) Images ( jstor ) Microscopy ( jstor ) Simulations ( jstor ) Velocity ( jstor ) Velocity distribution ( jstor ) Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering -- Dissertations, Academic -- UF boundary, cfd, complex, deconvolution, microfluidics, microscopy, mixer, mixing, recirculation, wavy - Genre:
- Electronic Thesis or Dissertation
born-digital ( sobekcm ) Mechanical Engineering thesis, Ph.D.
## Notes- Abstract:
- Because of the difficulty to achieve convective mixing in laminar flows, microfluidic mixers have been developed in this work to rapidly homogenized fluids in lab-on-a-chip devices. To evaluate the efficiency of fluid mixing in a mixer, direct visualization of microflows is needed. Hence a technique of coupling a conventional optical microscope with a computational deconvolution algorithm is explored to produce images of three-dimensional flows in plastic microfluidic channels. The approach, called deconvolution microscopy, is achieved by (1) optically sectioning the flow in the microchannel by collecting a series of fluorescence images at different focal planes along the optical axis, and (2) removing the out-of-focus fluorescence signal by the deconvolution method to reconstruct a corrected three-dimensional concentration image. Different convolution algorithms for a uniform concentration test case are compared, and then deconvolution microscopy is demonstrated in flow visualization in microfluidic channels. Deconvolution microscopy has been demonstrated in evaluating the fluid mixing by the flow twisting in ridged channels. An agreement has been found between the theoretic results and experimental results. A fluid phenomenon, flow recirculation, is explored for microfluidic mixing in lab-on-a-chip devices. Flow recirculation is induced when electroosmotic flow and Poiseuille flow are present in ridged channels. To understand flow recirculation, electroosmotic flow (EOF), a phenomenon resulting from the interaction of an external electric field and surface free charges in the electric double layer, is studied. The channel geometry variation represented by a wavy channel between a plane wall and a sinusoidal wall is investigated. An analytical solution to the EOF in the wavy channel using complex function theory is presented. Flow recirculation regions are predicted when an adverse pressure gradient is added to an EOF in the wavy channel. The onset condition of flow recirculation and the size of the recirculation region are determined. It is found that they are dependent on dimensionless parameters related to forces and the channel geometry. Experimental results are presented to validate the theoretical prediction and the analytical solution. After investigating flow twisting and flow recirculation, a novel microfluidic mixer is developed. It consists of a portion of ridged channels and two integrated electrodes. With the application of a pulsed electric filed, periodic flow recirculation is induced, and served as the secondary mixing mechanism in the mixer in addition to the flow twisting effect. To facilitate the mixer design, CFD software is employed to simulate the recirculation in the ridged channel and optimize the operation parameters for the mixer. An effective and efficient mixing performance from the proposed mixer is predicted by CFD simulation. Mixing experiments are also carried out on a prototype mixer to validate the mixing performance. The experimental results agree qualitatively with the CFD numerical results. ( en )
- General Note:
- In the series University of Florida Digital Collections.
- General Note:
- Includes vita.
- Bibliography:
- Includes bibliographical references.
- Source of Description:
- Description based on online resource; title from PDF title page.
- Source of Description:
- This bibliographic record is available under the Creative Commons CC0 public domain dedication. The University of Florida Libraries, as creator of this bibliographic record, has waived all rights to it worldwide under copyright law, including all related and neighboring rights, to the extent allowed by law.
- Thesis:
- Thesis (Ph.D.)--University of Florida, 2008.
- Local:
- Adviser: Fan, Zhonghui H.
- Local:
- Co-adviser: Sheplak, Mark.
- Electronic Access:
- RESTRICTED TO UF STUDENTS, STAFF, FACULTY, AND ON-CAMPUS USE UNTIL 2010-08-31
- Statement of Responsibility:
- by Zheng Xia.
## Record Information- Source Institution:
- University of Florida
- Holding Location:
- University of Florida
- Rights Management:
- Copyright Xia, Zheng. Permission granted to the University of Florida to digitize, archive and distribute this item for non-profit research and educational purposes. Any reuse of this item in excess of fair use or other copyright exemptions requires permission of the copyright holder.
- Embargo Date:
- 8/31/2010
- Classification:
- LD1780 2008 ( lcc )
## UFDC Membership |

Downloads |

## This item has the following downloads:
xia_z.pdf
xia_z_Page_022.txt xia_z_Page_057.txt xia_z_Page_110.txt xia_z_Page_025.txt xia_z_Page_098.txt xia_z_Page_120.txt xia_z_Page_043.txt xia_z_Page_144.txt xia_z_Page_123.txt xia_z_Page_047.txt xia_z_Page_139.txt xia_z_Page_015.txt xia_z_Page_138.txt xia_z_Page_091.txt xia_z_Page_049.txt xia_z_Page_106.txt xia_z_Page_124.txt xia_z_Page_064.txt xia_z_Page_010.txt xia_z_Page_006.txt xia_z_Page_036.txt xia_z_Page_032.txt xia_z_Page_075.txt xia_z_Page_037.txt xia_z_Page_065.txt xia_z_Page_021.txt xia_z_Page_080.txt xia_z_Page_115.txt xia_z_Page_143.txt xia_z_Page_142.txt xia_z_Page_013.txt xia_z_Page_050.txt xia_z_Page_020.txt xia_z_Page_053.txt xia_z_Page_128.txt xia_z_Page_039.txt xia_z_Page_097.txt xia_z_Page_014.txt xia_z_Page_041.txt xia_z_Page_130.txt xia_z_Page_084.txt xia_z_Page_092.txt xia_z_Page_073.txt xia_z_Page_059.txt xia_z_Page_086.txt xia_z_Page_088.txt xia_z_Page_071.txt xia_z_Page_024.txt xia_z_Page_076.txt xia_z_Page_116.txt xia_z_Page_046.txt xia_z_Page_126.txt xia_z_Page_149.txt xia_z_Page_102.txt xia_z_Page_121.txt xia_z_Page_134.txt xia_z_Page_068.txt xia_z_Page_146.txt xia_z_Page_028.txt xia_z_Page_011.txt xia_z_Page_055.txt xia_z_Page_051.txt xia_z_Page_090.txt xia_z_Page_033.txt xia_z_Page_056.txt xia_z_Page_004.txt xia_z_Page_094.txt xia_z_Page_016.txt xia_z_Page_035.txt xia_z_Page_017.txt xia_z_Page_054.txt xia_z_Page_058.txt xia_z_Page_078.txt xia_z_Page_132.txt xia_z_Page_096.txt xia_z_Page_145.txt xia_z_Page_087.txt xia_z_Page_061.txt xia_z_Page_031.txt xia_z_Page_042.txt xia_z_Page_148.txt xia_z_Page_045.txt xia_z_Page_118.txt xia_z_Page_085.txt xia_z_Page_122.txt xia_z_Page_018.txt xia_z_Page_072.txt xia_z_Page_007.txt xia_z_Page_113.txt xia_z_Page_112.txt xia_z_Page_103.txt xia_z_Page_147.txt xia_z_Page_117.txt xia_z_Page_119.txt xia_z_Page_048.txt xia_z_Page_030.txt xia_z_Page_038.txt xia_z_Page_008.txt xia_z_Page_074.txt xia_z_Page_062.txt xia_z_Page_129.txt xia_z_Page_150.txt xia_z_Page_127.txt xia_z_Page_135.txt xia_z_Page_077.txt xia_z_Page_052.txt xia_z_Page_089.txt xia_z_Page_044.txt xia_z_Page_081.txt xia_z_Page_101.txt xia_z_Page_107.txt xia_z_Page_001.txt xia_z_Page_003.txt xia_z_Page_002.txt xia_z_Page_019.txt xia_z_Page_083.txt xia_z_Page_095.txt xia_z_Page_067.txt xia_z_Page_141.txt xia_z_Page_005.txt xia_z_Page_105.txt xia_z_Page_099.txt xia_z_Page_136.txt xia_z_pdf.txt xia_z_Page_137.txt xia_z_Page_104.txt xia_z_Page_133.txt xia_z_Page_009.txt xia_z_Page_063.txt xia_z_Page_023.txt xia_z_Page_026.txt xia_z_Page_108.txt xia_z_Page_040.txt xia_z_Page_093.txt xia_z_Page_070.txt xia_z_Page_140.txt xia_z_Page_066.txt xia_z_Page_060.txt xia_z_Page_125.txt xia_z_Page_152.txt xia_z_Page_079.txt xia_z_Page_111.txt xia_z_Page_082.txt xia_z_Page_151.txt xia_z_Page_034.txt xia_z_Page_029.txt xia_z_Page_131.txt xia_z_Page_069.txt xia_z_Page_027.txt xia_z_Page_012.txt xia_z_Page_109.txt xia_z_Page_114.txt xia_z_Page_153.txt xia_z_Page_100.txt |

Full Text |

consecutively adjusted in discrete steps, and a stack of two-dimensional images of different sections are collected. Since the acquired images are blurred due to contributions outside the focal plane during the image formation, a digital process-called deconvolution-is carried out to remove the blurring and to reconstruct a corrected 3D image. Optical sectioning and the deconvolution algorithms used in this work are briefly discussed as follows; additional details can be found in the literature.60 61 3.2.1 Optical Sectioning In essence, optical sectioning samples discrete planes from a continuous light signal in a three-dimensional space. This sampling process must satisfy the Nyquist sampling theorem,6 63 which requires the sampling frequency to be greater than twice the input signal bandwidth in order to assure perfect reconstruction of the original signal from the sampled version. In the spatial domain, this requires a sampling interval to be less than half of the characteristic dimension of the source signal. A CCD camera is used to sample the discrete planes along the optical axis. The sampling interval in the axial direction (Az) is defined by the spacing between two adjacent image 1.4An acquisitions. The axial resolution of a microscope is defined by r = N where 2 is the light NA wavelength, n is the refractive index of media, and NA is the numerical aperture of the objective lens.60 To meet the requirement of the Nyquist sampling theorem, then A I< i i.e., 2 0.7An Az <--- NA2 (3-1) 3.2.2 Convolution The images acquired via optical sectioning are degraded for two reasons: optical blurring and image degradation due to electronic noise. Optic blurring is due to the optical aberration of Figure 3-4b shows the fluorescent images acquired at five locations downstream of the point M. The locations correspond to the centers of the 1st, 12th, 24th, 36th, and 48th ridge in the channel as indicated in the figure. For each location, the raw image is the synthesized photograph by simply stacking together all pictures taken during optical sectioning. The reconstructed image after 60 iterations of the blind MLE for each location is shown in Figure 3- 4c. The raw images from the first to the 48th ridge do not tell any trend in fluorescein distribution along the channel, whereas the reconstructed counterparts indicate the twisting flow as reported previously.19' 20 The two streams, fluorescein and water, twist about the axis of the channel. The images indicate that the two streams started to mix at 12th ridges, and a portion of fluorescein transposed to the other side indicated by the fluorescence signal at 24th ridge. When two streams travel further along the ridged channel, mixing becomes more thorough, as indicated by the more uniform fluorescence intensity in the downstream portion of the channel (48th ridge). In addition, the reconstructed images possess much less haze and are in a better agreement with the channel geometry. The results clearly show that the reconstructed image is the better reflection of the mixture in the channel. Using the reconstructed image in Figure 3-4c, the mixing efficiency is calculated. Following Johnson et al.,20 percentage of mixing is quantified using formula mix%=1- )- 2 !b Jo )2 mix% (3-2) where I/ is the intensity value at ith pixel, I. is the intensity value when solution is perfectly mixed (at infinity), and 1o is the intensity value at ith pixel at the beginning. The mixing percentages are 26%, 38%, 49%, and 59% at 12th, 24th, 36th, and 48th ridge, respectively. These values are comparable to what reported in the literature19 for the flow with a similar Peclet number, which takes into account the difference in the flow rate and geometry. force requirement when recirculation is desirable. It also provides a convenient tool to determine whether flow recirculation occurs in a wavy channel. 4.4.7 Recirculation Pattern and Size As expected, the pattern and size of recirculation region are dependent on the three dimensionless parameters, a, h, and K. The pattern of the recirculation region as a function of K is shown in Figure 4-11. Two recirculation modes are identified when there is flow recirculation in the wavy channel. As shown in Figures 4-1ld and 4-1le, type I recirculation mode consists of two series of bubbles: one centered at the trough of the wavy channel and the other centered at the necks. The bubbles are located near the centerline of the channel. Type II recirculation mode is displayed in Figures 4-1 If and 4-1 Ig, also consisting of two series of bubbles. However, the bubble centered at the trough is close to the top plain wall whereas the bubble centered at the neck is close to the bottom wavy wall. Both bubbles are spindle shaped and they are separated by flow streams in the direction of pressure gradient and in the middle of the channel. Flows in the direction of EOF lie between the bubbles and the channels walls. Significant difference exists between the center streams in two types of recirculation: the center streams wind through bubbles in type I whereas they flow smoothly in type II. The relationship between the size of recirculation region and the K value is plotted in Figure 4-14. The size is defined by the ratio of the area of recirculation region to the whole area of the wavy channel. The same geometry in Figure 4-11 is used and the flow patterns in Figure 4-11 are marked on the plot in Figure 4-14 with corresponding labels (a-g). As expected, the flow is recirculation-free when K is small. As K increases to 1.1, recirculation starts to occur. The bubbles rapidly expand as K increases until it reaches 1.25, at which the recirculation region reaches the maximum size, -52% of the total channel area. The bubble slowly shrinks where R'(x) = R(9(x)), R (x) = R(/(x)), Q'(x) = Q(Q(x)), and Q (x) = Q(/(x)). Substituting Equation 4-33 into Equations 4-15 and 4-16, the boundary conditions at the top flat wall yield d d 9[Rl[(x)]+ h d9[Q(x)] = 0 dx dx (4-39) and K d d 1 Bh h2 + 3[RR(x)] + [Q(x)]+h + 3[Qx)]= E (x) 4; dx dx 2 (4-40) And at the bottom periodical wall, we have B (-a cos(x))2 K (-a cos(x))3 + 291[R (x)] + 2(a cos(x)) [QP(x)] = 0 12;r (4-41) and B (-a cos(x)) -(-a cos(x))2 + d- [R (x)] + 9[Q (x)] + (-a cos(x)) d3[Q (x)] 4; dx dx = 1E (x) + a2 sin2 2 (4-42) Taking Cauchy integrals for F](4) R(;) and Fn(). Q(;') along a contour ABCDA shown in Figure 4-2b, the integral in this closed contour is zero according to the properties of an analytic function. Since the integral along BC cancels the integral along DA, the sum of integrals along path AB and CD is zero: exp(2np(x))RI (x)p'(x)dx + exp(2n/3(x))R8 (x)/'(x)dx = 0 (4-43) and Sexp(2n((x))Q (x)p'(x)dx + exp(2nf/(x))Q (x)/f'(x)dx= 0 (4-44) Equations 4-39 to 4-44 form a complete set of equations to solve Ro(x), RP(x), Qo(x), and Q((x). R(;) and Q(;) are then obtained from equations Equation 4-37 and 4-38, and subsequently substituted into equation 4-29 to yield the desired Vy(x,y). and nm [I-m +I, r- m -h In-m -+h q m o exp(2nh) n m=- n h exp(2nh) n )h (C exp(nh) Next, we multiply Inm(-na) on both sides of Equation C-8, and take summation from m -co to m = +o It yields 2 +m +++ a [21n +In+ 2 + B+ [In-m +T r T +T + -+ 2 n + I.-1 m .-1 + n-m.1 qm 4 m=- m=-2 -17) KcI [,-3 + 3,+ + 3;_, +31+1 (C-18) 96,7 A similar manipulation is applied to Equation C-9, we have m+C +m -a [I- I +I B- n- n m)# + n-m I4-a-i n-+ I n 4-i + 4 ) n m=-m m=-w K6 [2, + In2 + 1 + m[In m + Im]m 2 I (C-19) 16r m=-co 2 / Taking the zeroth order of Equations C-7, C-8, C-9 and C-11, we obtain Kh2 1 q0 + Bh =, (C-20) 8; 4;' 2 ro8__a(ql,8 + q8)+a-B = 0, (C-21) 2 4 q + -a I(q Ka2 1 16;r 4;' (C-22) (C-23) Sq a q -( -qPl). *d ~l \4\ *-\2 Equations C-16 to C-19, supplemented by Equations C-20 to C-23, are sufficient to solve the Fourier coefficient sets {(~ and {(q Once they are solved, q' and ir are determined from Equation C-12 and Equation C-14; q4 and r are solved from Equation C-6 and Equation C-7, as qr = (2nh-1) q +2nr +n g(g g), (C-24) and r = -h(q, + q,,)- i:. (C-25) The zeroth term of {r~ and {(q} are obtained from Equation C-10 and Equation C-11 at n = 0, namely, Equation C-23 and r2 = r-(- rl). (C-26) q will be used to control a relay for the pulsed electric field in the mixer, and the other will be connected to a CCD camera for triggering the exposure at each step of optical sectioning. Another issue in deconvolution microscopy for unsteady flow is the insufficient exposure in image acquisition. For visualizing steady flow, the exposure time of CCD camera can be set long enough so that the collected signal is stronger than the thermal noise. However for periodic flow of short period, shorter exposure is required and the resulting signal may be overshadowed by the electric noises in the CCD camera. Therefore multiple exposures may be taken at each step of the optical sectioning, and the average, with better signal to noise ratio, can be used in deconvolution. 6.2.3 Optimization of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer Once an accurate evaluation of fluid mixing in PRM becomes possible, the complete experimental characterization of PRM can be performed. In the CFD simulation of PRM, there are three parameters that will affect the performance of the mixer. They are K, the ratio of the external forces, the oscillation frequency of the repulsed electric field, and its duty cycle. In current work, only K is studied, as it's the major factor in determining the intensity of flow recirculation in ridged channel. In the future work, a parametric study may be carried out to characterize the mixer, and search for the optimal working condition. 6.2.4 Analytical Solution of EOF in Irregular Channel Another possible direction is to further develop the analytical method used in solving EOF in wavy channel and apply it in solving EOF in other 2D periodic geometries as shown in Figure 6-2. Demonstrated by the micro particles seeded in the fluid, the flows in these periodic channels also have recirculation inside the channel, but the shape of recirculation region appears different from the one in wavy channel. Further research work can start from the current ACKNOWLEDGMENTS My utmost gratitude goes to my PhD advisor, Dr. Hugh Fan for allowing me to join his lab, for his expertise, guidance, and most of all, for his patience. Without his support and his guidance, I wouldn't perform and finish this dissertation work. I am also greatly indebted to my committee members, Dr. Mark Sheplak, Dr. Renwei Mei, Dr. Lou Cattafesta and Dr. Ranganathan Narayanan for their valuable suggestions on my dissertation. My thanks and appreciation goes to my former lab colleagues, Dr. Qian Mei for her continuous presence whenever a discussion is needed, Carl Fredrickson for his readiness to help on device fabrication, Dr. Champak Das for his continual encouragement in all these years of my PhD work. I also want to express my gratitude to the fellow graduate students Ruba Khnouf, Karthik Pitchaimani, Jacqueline Viren, Cesar Moreira, Pan Gu, undergraduate students Fernando Tavares, Corey Walker, Andrew Simon, Austin Gispanski, and post-doc colleagues Dr. Alexander Stoyanov, Dr. Jiyou Zhang, Dr. Hong Chen for the wonderful time I spent with them in the lab. Their help made my work much smoother. And then there are other people who have made Gainesville a very special place over these years. They are Chao Cao, Liqun Xu, Jun Liu, Xiaomin Lu and Heshan Lin, Kun Chen and Zhenzhen Zhang, Mingzhen Bao, Yingyan Lou, Lu Ma, Jianlin Li, Jiejin Zhang, Lezhou Zhan and Anna Leung, Yingling Huang and Wenqiang Tian, Hong Wang, Qi Song, and Yawei Li. Finally, I would like to thank my parents whose love is boundless, for traveling across the Pacific and be on my side in this most glorious moment of my life. I thank my wife, Xinyi who has stood beside me and encouraged me constantly. My most special thanks go to my newborn baby, Chase for giving me happiness and joy every day and night. To my precious family, I dedicate this dissertation. 2.2.3 Bonding The PDMS piece is sealed by a blank PDMS cover of same size, and then bonded to a glass slide to the side with no features. The cover PDMS piece has holes punched at locations corresponding at well 2 and converging point N. The PDMS and the glass surfaces are treated by plasma using a high frequency generator (Electro-Technic Products, Chicago, IL) to promote bonding. A picture of the finished PDMS device with wavy channels is shown in Figure 2-7. 2.3 Micro Mixer Once the flow recirculation in a ridged channel is well understood, it is incorporated in a micro mixer design to facilitate mixing by flow recirculation. Details of the discussion on the microfluidic mixer are provided in Chapter 5. 2.3.1 Device Design The overall design of the micro mixer (Figure 2-8) is similar to the device consisting of the wavy channels, except for the patterns of the channel between M and N. The small portion of channel circled by dashed lines in the figure is the ridged channel similar to the ones discussed in section 2.1. The pattern, including 20 parallelograms, accounts for ridged channels of 2.1- millimeter in length, while the total length of the channel connecting M and N is 20 mm. Two electrodes, printed on the cover film, are to be placed outside the ridged channel portion as schematically shown in Figure 2-8. 2.3.2 Fabrication of Plastic Substrates The fabrication processes (photolithography, hot embossing, trimming and drilling) of the micro mixer are exactly same as the process described in section 2.1. Briefly, the micro mixer is first built in a glass plate, which serves as a master to generate a nickel mold by electroplating. Plastic resins are then pressed against the mold to replicate plastic chips. They are cut into desired shapes on a CNC milling machine; and holes are drilled at the ends of the channels. 2.1.2 Photolithography The pattern on the photomask is then reproduced in a glass plate via photolithography using microfabrication equipment at the University of Florida Nano-Fabrication facility. A 4- inch square, 0.2-inch thick soda-lime glass plate, pre-coated with a chromium layer (0.12ym) and a photoresist layer (0.2ym Shipley 1800), is purchased from Telic Company (Valencia, CA), and used in wet-etching for a glass master. The fabrication procedure is described as follows and illustrated in Figure 2-3. 1. The glass plate aligned with the photomask (Figure 2-3a,b), is exposed to UV light (365 nm) for 30 seconds at an approximate intensity of 10 mW/cm2, using a Karl-Suss MA6 mask aligner (SUSS MicroTec, Germany). 2. The glass plate is then rinsed in photoresist developer (AZ 312MIF, Clariant Corporation, Somerville, NJ) for 40 seconds to removed the exposed photoresist. 3. The glass plate is transferred to a container with chromium etchant (1020, Transene, Danvers, MA) for 30 seconds to etch away the unprotected chromium. 4. A glass etching is subsequently carried out by immersing the glass plate in a glass etchant solution (HF/HNO3/H20 mixture with volume ratio of 20:14:66) for 12 minutes. As a result of isotropic etching described above, ridged channels are created on the glass substrate (Figure 2-3c). 5. The remaining photoresist and chromium on the glass plate are removed in acetone and chromium etchant (Figure 2-3d). 2.1.3 Electroplating The glass plate, with ridged channels created on the surface, serves as the master piece in electroplating. It is cleaned and then shipped to Optical Electro Forming (Clearwater, FL) to generate a nickel electroforming mold. The glass plate is first coated with a conductive seeding layer, and then connected to the positive pole of a power supply, while the negative pole is attached to a nickel source. Both are placed in a solution of nickel salt. As the electrical current flows through the circuit, nickel ions in the solution lose their charge and settle on the glass plate, while at the other pole the nickel source slowly dissolves and replenishes the ions in the 2008 Zheng Xia w .* + ..... U' 9 Figure 6-2. Microscopic images of fluid flow in periodic channels of different profiles sinusoidall, square-wavy, and triangle-wave). The fluid is seeded with microbead of 0.75 micron in diameter. Pathlines of beads is obtained by overlapping 60 consecutive images. EOF is in the opposite direction of the pressure gradient. The recirculation flow regions are indicated by denser bead population (more dark spots). Figure 5-14. Experiment setup for the fluid mixing of Rhodamine-B solution and DI water in a prototype PRM. The two incoming fluids are pumped into PRM by two sets of syringe pumps that are connected to the inlets. External electric field is imposed via the two metal wire glued on the mixer. A detailed view of PRM is shown in the inset. 19. A. D. Stroock, S. K. W. Dertinger, A. Ajdari, I. Mezic, H. A. Stone and G. M. Whitesides, Science, 2002, 295, 647-651. 20. T. J. Johnson, D. Ross and L. E. Locascio, Anal Chem, 2002, 74, 45-51. 21. M. Grumann, A. Geipel, L. Riegger, R. Zengerle and J. Ducree, Lab on a Chip, 2005, 5, 560-565. 22. C. H. Lin, L. M. Fu and Y. S. Chien, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 5265-5272. 23. G. G. Yaralioglu, I. O. Wygant, T. C. Marentis and B. T. Khuri-Yakub, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 3694-3698. 24. J. B. Knight, A. Vishwanath, J. P. Brody and R. H. Austin, Physics Review Letter, 1998, 30, 3863- 3866. 25. T. Rohr, C. Yu, M. H. Davey, F. Svec and J. M. J. Frechet, Electrophoresis, 2001, 22, 3959-3967. 26. T. Burghelea, E. Segre, I. Bar-Joseph, A. Groisman and V. Steinberg, Physical Review E, 2004, 69,-. 27. R. H. Liu, M. A. Stremler, K. V. Sharp, M. G. Olsen, J. G. Santiago, R. J. Adrian, H. Aref and D. J. Beebe, Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems, 2000, 9, 190-197. 28. F. Schonfeld, V. Hessel and C. Hofmann, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 65-69. 29. Y. C. Chung, Y. L. Hsu, C. P. Jen, M. C. Lu and Y. C. Lin, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 70-77. 30. A. O. El Moctar, N. Aubry and J. Batton, Lab on a Chip, 2003, 3, 273-280. 31. H. H. Bau, J. H. Zhong and M. Q. Yi, Sensors andActuators B-Chemical, 2001, 79, 207- 215. 32. H. Suzuki, C. M. Ho and N. Kasagi, Journal ofMicroelectromechanical Systems, 2004, 13, 779-790. 33. A. P. Sudarsan and V. M. Ugaz, Lab on a Chip, 2006, 6, 74-82. 34. 0. Kuksenok, J. M. Yeomans and A. C. Balazs, Physical Review E, 2002, 65, - 35. E. Biddiss, D. Erickson and D. Li, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 3208-3213. 36. L. F. Greer and A. A. Szalay, Luminescence, 2002, 17, 43-74. 37. T. J. Johnson and L. E. Locascio, Lab Chip, 2002, 2, 135-140. 38. R. J. Adrian, Experiments in Fluids, 2005, 39, 159-169. LIST OF TABLES Table page 3-1 Com prison of deconvolution algorithm s..................................... ......................... 61 5-1 Summary of boundary conditions for CFD simulation....................................................118 CHAPTER 2 DEVICE DESIGN AND FABRICATION* This chapter describes the design and fabrication process of three LOC devices that are used in the dissertation work. The first device is made from plastics and consists of a ridged channel, which is used in studying fluid mixing in ridged channel and validating deconvolution microscopy for microfluidic visualization. The device is also used in studying the flow recirculation, a phenomenon observed in ridged channels when a pressure drop and an electric field are imposed. The second device is made from PDMS and consists of a wavy channel, which is essentially a simplified form (2D version) of the ridged channel. The third device, a micro mixer is developed utilizing the flow recirculation phenomenon. The mixer incorporates a portion of ridged channel and a pair of screen-printed electrodes. The characterization of the fabrication process is reported at the end of this chapter. 2.1 Ridged Channel The ridge structures in the ridged channel are designed to mimic the herringbone structures19 or slanted wells37 described in the literature. The formation of herringbone structures requires an anisotropic etching in a silicon wafer and then transferred into a PDMS device, but is difficult to achieve in a glass plate on which the anisotropic etching is difficult. In addition, the creation of two channel depths (one for the channel and one for herringbone structures) requires a multiple photolithographic process with two photomasks and a stringent optical alignment. Slanted wells are produced by using an additional step-laser ablation-after microfabrication of microchannels in a plastic device.20 * Part of this chapter has been published in "Deconvolution Microscopy for Flow Visualization in Microchannels", Analytical Chemestry, 2007, 79(6): p. 2576-2582; and in "Effects of Fabrication Process Parameters on the Properties of Cyclic Olefin Copolymer Microfluidic Devices", Journal ofMicroElectroMechanical Systems, 2006, 15(5): p. 1060-1068. (a mask (a) s -substrate (b) , (d) Figure 2-1. Creation of ridged channels through isotropic etching. Isotropic etching with a single continuous opening leads to a D-shaped channel (a), and the SEM picture is shown in (c). Ridges are obtained from judicious designs and isotropic etching (b), as illustrated by SEM picture of a ridged channel (d) in a microfluidic device made from cyclic olefin copolymers. The scaling bars in (c) and (d) are 100 [m and 200 rim, respectively I I h Aw l' / Fr Figure 2-2. Photomask layout of a T-channel. Three wells in the layout are numbered for references in the text. The lengths of the lines connecting wells 1 and 2 to the intersection M are 4.6 and 10.2 mm respectively, while the line connecting well 3 to N is 4.6 mm long. The ridged channel portion (from M to N) is 40 mm in length. In the inset, the angel of parallelogram is 45, w = 30,/m, h = 30/m and 1 = 108/m . r r r I r 0 e ;-/_s "- L The solution indicates that the electric field strength changes along the wall surface as a result of the variation of the channel wall. A similarity exists between the flow velocity and the electric field; this verifies the calculation result that suggests the EOF is irrotational in a wavy channel. Unlike a creeping flow driven by a pressure gradient or a Couette flow, an EOF contains no recirculation region even with a wall of large wave amplitude. The EOF in a wavy channel can result in recirculation regions when a pressure gradient in the opposite direction is added. The predication by the analytical solution is confirmed by the presence of recirculation bubbles observed in experiments. The result in a microfabricated device agrees with the similar observation in a capillary recently reported and studied using a perturbation method.105 The onset conditions for recirculation in a wavy channel are found to depend on one dimensionless parameter related to the external forces (K) and two dimensionless parameters related to the wavy channel geometry (a and h). The results are summarized in a diagram relating recirculation to K, a, and h. The pattern and size of the recirculation region are also found to depend on these three dimensionless parameters. This work on the sinusoidal wavy channel is expected to help understand the interaction between pressure and electrokinetic forces in an irregular geometry flow, including the flow in ridged channels. In practical calculation, the infinite series in Equations C-16 to C-19 are truncated to only Nterms. Together with Equations C-20 to C-23, there are a total of 4N + 4 equations to solve for B, q', {(rn and {q}, me [-N,N]. Subsequently, {rl) and {qZ) are solved from Equations C-12, C-14, and C-23 to C-26. Finally, {r,}, {r,}), {qZ} and {q}) are used to construct R(,;) and Q(,;) in Equation 4-37 and Equation 4-38, and they are used to solve for Vr(x, y) in Equation 4-29. Note that the EOF is from right to the left based on the boundary condition defined in Equation 4-6 whereas the pressure-driven flow is from the left to the right based on the boundary condition defined in Equation 4-5. The ratio of the pressure drop (Figure 4-9b) to the electric potential difference (Figure 4-9a) is \K = 2. A negative K value indicates that one of these two flows is reversed and they move in the same direction. The superposition of the EOF and the Poiseuille flow in the same direction results in a combined flow, that is shown in Figure 4-9c for the velocity profile and in Figure 4-9d for the streamline. The combined flow possesses a quadratic velocity profile, which is different from the EOF. The combined flow also possesses finite velocity at the wall, which is different from no slip condition in the pressure driven flow. It is interesting to observe the presence of recirculation when the EOF is superposed in the opposition direction with the pressure driven flow (K = 2), as shown in Figures 4-9e and 4-9f The velocity profile in Figure 4-9e indicates the presence of a backflow, while the streamline pattern in Figure 4-9f shows the presence of recirculation region where two series of eddies are observed at the top of the trough area and the bottom of the neck area of the wavy channel respectively. This is different from the flow separation in a typical creeping Couette flow or Poiseuille flow in wavy channels that occurs in the bottom of trough area due to the adverse pressure gradient.91' 95,97 The formation of the recirculation region in Figure 4-9f is the result of the interaction between the pressure driven flow and electroosmotic flow in channels of varying cross sections. As shown in Figure 4-9e, the superimposed flow experiences backflow at the center of the channel when the maximum velocity of the pressure driven flow exceeds the EOF velocity. Two separation bubbles can be easily identified in the flow. They form mainly as a result of 6r (B) (f ) h 0.4 (a)-- (d) 0.2 (b) -(e 0 200 400 600 800 1000 120C travel distance (aim) 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 In(Pe) Figure 5-6. Simulated mixing performance of the PRM. (A) Plot of specimen concentration variation at different cross sections of ridged channel mixer. 3,=0.05 mM, is the variance at the entrance of the channels. The continuous lines (a-d) represent the mixing coefficient in the ridged channel; while the dashed lines (e-h) are for the segment of regular channel. Data points marked as 'A' (a and e) are measured in flow with flow rate of 1.25 nL/s. As a result, the flow has Reynolds number of 0.04 and Peclet number of 113. Data with mark '[', 'o', and 'x' are from flows of Pe=450 (b and f), Pe=1800 (c and g), and Pe=7200 (d and h), respectively. (B) Plot of mixing amplification by the ridged channel as a function of In(Pe). (a) (b) Figure 5-7. Top views of streaklines of massless particles convected by flows in ridged channels. The Poiseuille flow (a) and electroosmotic flow (b) in ridged channels simulated by CFD-ACE+. Also presented are the velocity profiles in the flow. A 0.2 second duration is used in generating streaklines in pressure driven flow to ensure they fit in the figure. 1. (A) (a) 00 i-I-I-If MPM P~sEi (c) Figure 2-3. Fabrication process of plastic LOC devices. (a) photomask; (b) pre-coated glass plate, aligned with photomask, is exposed to UV light; (c) photoresist, chromium, and glass substrate are etched sequentially; (d) the remaining photoresist and chromium are stripped off the glass plate; (e) a nickel E-form is generated from the glass plate; (f) plastic resins are pressed against the E-form; (g-h) plastic chip is taken off the E- form, and trimmed into desired shape. S i;::i l;i; .ii,. *t r "' ~lr Figure 2-4. Plastic device with 6 channels. The highlighted one is the ridged channel designed for test. t Unit vectors tangential to microchannel walls T Temperature V Velocity vector z valence number a Scaled wave amplitude, 2;r A/L 3 Variance of specimen concentration at a cross section E Electric permittivity 1 Complex variable cpot Zeta potential, electric potential at Stern plane r7 Electroosmotic mobility Ad Debye length A Light wavelength v Kinematic viscosity SComplex variables Electric potential p Density Pe Electric charge density r Characteristic time scale of pulsed electric field ~0 Characteristic applied electric potential V/ Stream function o) Vorticity 5.5 Experiment Validation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer 5.5.1 Experiment Setup A prototype PRM is connected to syringe pumps and placed on an invert microscope. A 0.1 mM Rhodamine-B solution and deionized water are pumped into the mixer at the same flow rate. A UV lamp is equipped to the microscope to illuminate the fluid flow. A high speed CCD camera (Hamamatsu, Japan) is used to acquire the fluorescent emission from the Rhodamine-B in the fluid. The intensity of fluorescence emission is proportional to the concentration of Rhodamine-B in the mixer. Hence one may evaluate the distribution of Rhodamine-B in the fluid in the mixer by examining the fluorescent images. The pulse signal in the mixer is generated by an in-house LabView program and a high- voltage amplifier. The high-voltage is imposed to the fluid in the mixer via two electric wires that are glued to the printed carbonate ink electrodes. The whole experiment setup, including the microscope and the fluid flow systems, are enclosed in a house-made opaque box, so that minimal environment light is present during image acquisition. The experiment setup is illustrated in Figure 5-14. 5.5.2 Experiment Results and Analysis As predicted by the CFD simulation, the mixing performance of a pulsed recirculation mixer is significantly dependent on the applied electric field, namely, its frequency, duty cycle, and amplitude. Among the three operation parameters, the electric field amplitude plays the most critical role in determining the performance, and it is related to K, a dimensionless parameter defined as the ratio of the electric force to the pressure force on the fluid in the mixer. In this section, mixing experiments are conducted to verify the mixing performance by the pulsed recirculation mixer. pot 1= v (1-21) the expression for the electroosmosis component can be simplified as u, (y)= uE(1-e '- ) (1-22) The velocity profile of an EOF (dp/dx = 0 in Equation 1-20) in the channel with an constant cross sectional area is thus a plug shape, as plotted in Figure 1-2. The EOF velocity near the channel wall is amplified and plotted in Figure 1-3. At the surface, the velocity is zero because of the non-slipping boundary condition. Towards the centerline of the channel, the flow velocity approximates asymptotically to a constant value (/E ), which is determined by the electric field, the fluid viscosity, the fluid dielectric permittivity, and the channel surface zeta potential. The velocity increases dramatically in the vicinity of the channel surface such that in the distance of several Debye length (- 5Ad ), the velocity already reaches within 99% of the asymptotic value. Consider a typical case that the channel width h is 3 orders of magnitude larger than the EDL thickness, the flow is approximately regarded as a plug flow moving at a constant velocity, u = jE The EOF in a channel of varying cross sectional area, however, does not resemble a plug flow any more. The velocity profile, as will be discussed in Chapter 4, depends on the variation as well as the channel width. 1.3 Microfluidic Mixing In general, a lab-on-a-chip device integrates multiple components capable of various analytical functions: mixing, extraction, separation and detection. A mixer, as demonstrated in the example below, is one of the most crucial components. Because of the difficulty in achieving convective mixing in laminar flows at low Reynolds numbers, LOC devices for application of chemical reactions or biological assays often require a mixer to rapidly homogenize solutions of 80. E. B. Cummings, S. K. Griffiths, R. H. Nilson and P. H. Paul, Anal Chem, 2000, 72, 2526- 2532. 81. S. K. Griffiths and R. H. Nilson, Anal Chem, 2000, 72, 4767-4777. 82. H. SalimiMoosavi, T. Tang and D. J. Harrison, Journal of the American Chemical Society, 1997, 119, 8716-8717. 83. S. C. Jacobson, R. Hergenroder, L. B. Koutny, R. J. Warmack and J. M. Ramsey, Anal Chem, 1994, 66, 1107-1113. 84. J. C. Burns and T. Parkes, JFluidMech, 1967, 29, 731-743. 85. J. C. F. Chow and K. Soda, Phys Fluids, 1972, 15, 1700-&. 86. C. Y. Wang, Phys Fluids, 1978, 21, 697-698. 87. C. Y. Wang, Phys Fluids, 2003, 15, 1114-1121. 88. I. J. Sobey, JFluidMech, 1980, 96, 1-26. 89. K. D. Stephanoff, I. J. Sobey and B. J. Bellhouse, JFluidMech, 1980, 96, 27-&. 90. S. Tsangaris and E. Leiter, Journal ofEngineering ,ti/heluhtii \, 1984, 18, 89-103. 91. C. Pozrikidis, JFluidMech, 1987, 180, 495-514. 92. C. Pozrikidis, JFluidMech, 1988, 188, 275-300. 93. H. Luo and C. Pozrikidis, JFluidMech, 2006, 556, 167-188. 94. M. Hemmat and A. Borhan, Phys Fluids, 1995, 7, 2111-2121. 95. G. Leneweit and D. Auerbach, JFluidMech, 1999, 387, 129-150. 96. M. Scholle, Arch ApplMech, 2004, 73, 823-840. 97. A. E. Malevich, V. V. Mityushev and P. M. Adler, Acta Mech, 2006, 182, 151-182. 98. H. H. Wei, S. L. Waters, S. Q. Liu and J. B. Grotberg, JFluidMech, 2003, 492, 23-45. 99. H. Zhou, R. J. Martinuzzi, R. E. Khayat, A. G. Straatman and E. Abu-Ramadan, Phys Fluids, 2003, 15, 3114-3133. 100. J. G. Santiago, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 2353-2365. 101. E. Lauga, A. D. Stroock and H. A. Stone, Phys Fluids, 2004, 16, 3051-3062. 102. A. D. Polianin, Handbook of linear partial differential equations for engineers and scientists, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Boca Raton, 2002. 103. B. P. Palka, An introduction to complex function theory, Springer-Verlag, New York 1991. 104. H. K. Moffatt, JFluidMech, 1964, 18, 1-18. 105. S. Y. Park, C. J. Russo, D. Branton and H. A. Stone, Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, 2006, 297, 832-839. 106. M. Gu, Advanced Optical Imaging Theory, Springer, Berlin, 1999. method is chosen in the CFD-ACE+ software settings to solve the Navier-Stokes equation for the flow and the Poisson's equation for the electric field in the channel. Algebraic Multigrid Solver (AMG) is elected in solving the linear equations for its advantage in solving unstructured meshing. A maximum of 1000 iteration was carried out to ensure the convergence of solution, unless a 10-4 order of reduction in the residue is met or the absolute value of the residue reaches 10-1. 5.2.3 Poiseuille Flow in Ridged Channels The experiment in Chapter 3 has shown that a segment of ridged channels can achieve a comparable mixing performance to the staggered herringbone mixer. With the model illustrated in Figure 5-4, CFD-ACE+ is employed to quantitatively evaluate the performance of the ridged channel mixer. Two distinct streams, deionized water and a solution containing 0.1 mM specimen, are introduced into the ridged channel (Figure 5-5a) at the same flow rate. Each fills half of the cross section of the entrance. The diffusivity of specimen is set to be 3.3x10-10 m2/s. Without the ridge structures, specimen molecules gradually diffuse into water stream from their interface as the two fluids move through a regular channel (Figure 5-5b). Complete mixing is achieved when specimen diffusion reaches from the interface of the two streams to the other side of water stream and a uniform concentration (0.05 mM) is reached throughout of the channel cross section. The process, however, takes considerable amount of time as the molecular diffusion is generally very slow, especially for large molecules. The ridged channel is able to increase the diffusion process by stretching and folding flows so that the distance for diffusion to reach becomes shorter and the interfacial area becomes larger. The mixing process in the channel is verified by inspecting the specimen distribution at the cross sections in CFD-VIEW (Figure 5-5c). In the cross sectional views, blue stream , f .. / / ( V. W/ /, /-: ( ..T5^' / / I1g Figure 5-12. Temporal variation of Rhodamine-B distribution at a cross section of the periodic recirculation mixer over one period. (a-j) are Rhodamine-B distribution at cross section (II in Figure 5-11) at the interval of 0.1 second. Also shown are the Rhodamine-B distribution when a constant electric field applied (k) and the Rhodamine-B distribution at cross section of a regular channel without any ridge structures (/). section I section II section III section IV 1 2 3 time (sec) x108 4 (3 o I2 o o A) 1 C- a, V) 4 5 6 0 4 5 6 0 ridged channel pulsed recirculation regular channel 200 400 600 800 1000 travel distance in channel (jim) 1200 Figure 5-13. Evolution of the Rhodamine-B concentration variation in the fluid in a PRM. (A) The evolution of Rhodamine-B concentration variation at cross sections of pulsed recirculation mixer (I, II, III, and IV in Figure 5-11). The time-averaged variation during one cycle is plotted against traveling distance in (B). Also plotted in (B) are the Rhodamine-B concentration variations in the same ridged channel but without the application of electric field, as well as the variations in a segment of regular channel. x10-8 0 5A S4 0 - ,3 o C/) 0 0 ,i - , i ~c" . i,' I 1 l /l A microfluidic mixer, called pulsed recirculation mixer, is designed and fabricated on plastic substrates. Faster and effective mixing is achieved by the prototype PRM as predicted by the numerical simulation. The mixing results, as a result of the flow recirculation, significantly depend on a dimensionless parameter related to the external forces. Fluid mixing experiments are conducted on a prototype PRM, and the results confirm the numerical predictions. The major objective of the research is achieved: pulsed recirculation mixer is an effective and efficient mixer for microfluidic systems. To recapitulate the research work on the pulsed recirculation mixer design, a road map is presented in Figure 6.1 to illustrate the work flow. The research work starts from the observation of recirculation in ridged channel (Figure 6.1a). By simplifying such recirculation to flow in the wavy channel (Figure 6.1b and 6.1c), an analytical solution is developed so that a parametric study on the recirculation is possible (Figure 6. d). The systematic investigation of flow recirculation in the wavy channel helps study the flow recirculation in the ridged channel both numerically and experimentally (Figure 6. e). A full cycle of research work has been accomplished, and the results are eventually applied in design and optimization of a microfluidic mixer based on flow recirculation (Figure 6. If). 6.2 Future Directions 6.2.1 Deconvolution Algorithm As pointed in Chapter 3, commercial deconvolution software is used in deconvolution microscopy, and the results are sometimes imperfect. To improve the quality of reconstructed image, new deconvolution algorithm can be developed for specific application of visualizing microfluidic flows. The new algorithm should be based on the blind MLE deconvolution algorithm, since it yields the best results among all tested deconvolution algorithms. Additional constraints should be applied to penalize any non-zero value at pixels outside the channel Figure 2-10. Plastic device with a pulsed recirculation mixer. Solutions are pumped into the mixer via inlets E and F, which are glued to wells 1 and 2. Wires C and D are glued to electrode pads A and B. An electric field is applied to the mixer by connecting C and D to an external power supply. Figure 2-11. Glass master, the E-form and a plastic chip used in the work. TABLE OF CONTENTS page A C K N O W L E D G M E N T S ..............................................................................................................4 LIST OF TA BLES ....................... ....................................................... 8 LIST OF FIGU RE S ................................................................. 9 L IS T O F S Y M B O L S ............................................................................................................... 12 ABSTRAC T ................................................... ............... 14 CHAPTER 1 IN TR O D U C T IO N ................................................................................ 16 1.1 Lab-on-a-chip and M EM S ..................................... ......... .. ..... ................. 16 1.2 M icrofluidics and Electroosmosis ................. ...............................18 1.2.1 Electric Double Layer ................ ................ .. ..... .......19 1.2.2 Electroosmosis................ ........ .. ... .... ................. 21 1.3 M icrofluidic M ixing .............................................................................................24 1.4 Objectives and Study Overview ....................................................................... 28 2 DEVICE DESIGN AND FABRICATION ................................. ...............33 2 .1 R id g e d C h a n n el .............. .......................................................................................... 3 3 2 .1 .1 D e sig n ............................................................................................................... 3 4 2 .1.2 P hotolithography ..............................................................35 2 .1 .3 E le ctro p latin g ................................................................................................... 3 5 2.1.4 Hot Embossing ..................................... ..... .. ...... ............ 36 2 .1 .5 B o n d in g ................... ..................................................................... 3 6 2 .2 W av y C h an n el ...................................................................................................... 3 6 2.2.1 Design .......... ......... ......................... ............ 37 2.2.2 Soft Lithography ............... ......... .............. ..................38 2 .2 .3 B o n d in g ................................................................3 9 2 .3 M icro M ixer.....................................................39 2.3.1 Device Design ................................... .......................... 39 2.3.2 Fabrication of Plastic Substrates ......................................... .. ........................39 2.3.3 E lectrode Printing ............... ................................................ .. ................ 40 2.4 Characterization of Fabrication Process .............................. ................... ............... 40 2.4.1 Comparison between Glass Master and E-Form .............................................41 2.4.2 Comparison between E-Form and Plastic Chip.................................................. 41 2.4.3 Comparison of Plastic Chip and Glass Master............. ...................42 2.4.1 Comparison between Glass Master and E-Form Comparing the measurements between the glass master and the E-form, it is found the ridge heights on the E-form are statistically greater than the channel depths on the glass master. The increase is averaged 0.31 ym with a variance of 0.09 um. Figure 2-12 shows the histogram of the difference between the two sets of measurements. The expansion of E-form may result from the addition of a seeding layer between the E- form and the glass master during the electroplating process. Because glass is non-conductive material, a thin layer of silver nitride is deposited on the glass master surface to allow the growth of nickel. According to the manufacturer, a silver nitride solution is sprayed over the glass surface before it's placed into the electroplating bath. As the electroplating process is over, the whole piece is immersed in a solvent, where the seeding layer is dissolved and the nickel plate is separated from the glass master. The seeding layer, however, is not a conformal coating on the glass surface. Instead, less silver nitride is sprayed into the channel cavity, so that the seeding layer deposited on the channel surface is thinner than the rest of the glass plate surface. The non- uniformity leads to the difference between the ridge heights on the E-form and the channel depths on the glass master, and eventually contributes to the discrepancy between the resulting plastic chip and the glass master. 2.4.2 Comparison between E-Form and Plastic Chip In comparison to the height of ridges on the E-form, the depth of the channel on the plastic chip is statistically shallower (Figure 2-13). The difference is averaged -0.31 ym with a variance of 0.12 ym. A possible cause for the shrinkage of the plastic chip is the mold shrinkage of the plastic material as it cools after the hot embossing. According to Topas Advanced Polyers,43 Topas 8007 has a typical mold shrinkage value in the range of 0.6% to 0.7%. Since the feature edge of EDL is assumed a constant (denoted as or). Because the periodic channel geometry, the flow is periodic in the x-direction. The governing equations in this flow include the continuity equation, momentum equations, and Poisson equation: V- =0, (4-1) (V.V)V VPP- P P (4-2) and V2 = _Pe E (4-3) where V(x, y) is the velocity vector (with u as the x component and v as the y component), p(x,y) is the pressure, pe(x,y) is the electric charge density and O(x,y) is the electric potential in the fluid flow. The boundary conditions are V(x- L/2,y)= V(x + L/2, y) (4-4) p(x-L/2,y)= p(x+L/2,y)+ P (45) (x-L/2, y)= (x+L/2, y)- ), (4-6) and Swals (4-7) In the bulk flow (also called as the outer flow region, relative to the double layer100), the electric charge is neutral. As a result, the Lorentz force is dropped from the momentum Equation 4-2, which becomes the incompressible Navier-Stokes equation, (V. V)V = v+ vV2V P (4-8) and the Poisson equation (Equation 4-3) becomes the Laplace equation by dropping the charge density term, Figure 5-15. Comparison between the flow in the inactive mixer and the flow in the active mixer. (a) A top view of the ridged channel portion between the two electrodes. (b) Without the application of electric field, the top views (i, ii, iii) of fluid flows in the channel, at 1st, 5th and 9th ridge structures. The incoming streams are 0. ImM RB solution and DI water, both are pumped at flow rate of 13 nL/s. (c) With the application of a pulsed electric field, the top views (iv, v, vi) of fluid flows in the channel, at the same locations. The flow rate is set at 13 nL/s, and the average electric field is about 1000 V/cm, the oscillation frequency is 5 Hz, and the duty cycle is 50%. The resulting K is about 20. ~TT-Q~C-AMID, # F(4")G(4)d= 0 ABCDA (4-25) As both F,(4) and G(4) have a period of 2;r, the integral along BC balances the integral along DA. Hence the sum of integrals along path AB and CD is zero, I exp(2np(x))G (x)(p'(x)dx + J exp(2nf (x))G' (x)/'(x)dx = 0 S-(4-26) Equations 4-22, 4-23 and 4-26 form a complete set of equations to solve G((x) and GP(x). The detailed solving procedure is detailed in Appendix C. G(4) is subsequently obtained from Equation 4-20, and O(x,y) is determined from Equation 4-19. Since the electric field is defined asE = -VV, the tangential electric field strength along walls, which is used in solving stream function, is obtained from d 1 E(x) = 2 3[G (x)] - dx 2r (4-27) and d 1 2 3[G (x)]- E (x)= dx 2; Fl+a sin (x) (4-28) 4.3.2 Stream Function The same approach is also used to obtain the solution of the biharmonic equation (Equation 4-12). Using the periodic boundary condition (Equation 4-13), a general solution to the biharmonic equation is written as, V(x, y)= By2 +Cy + (R(S)+R())+y (()+ Q()) (4-29) whereR(") and Q(;) are arbitrary periodic analytical functions satisfying the periodic boundary conditions in the x-direction R(y/2 +(x- )i/2)= R(y/2 +(x + )i/2) and Q(y/2+(x- r)i/2)= Q(y/2 +(x+)i/2);B and C are real-valued constants.96'102 Using Equations 4-14, 4-21 and 4-29, the pressure can be expressed as reagents. This need has long been recognized, and a considerable account of literatures has been devoted on micro mixer design for LOC devices.17-35 Consider an example of a LOC device for protein expression. The device consists of an in vitro transcription and translation (IVT) system in which proteins are synthesized through two steps: a DNA template is transcribed into messenger RNA through RNA polymerase process with an appropriate promoter; the resulting RNA is thereafter translated into proteins with ribosomes and additional necessary components. To detect the protein expression yield, the product of the IVT has to be mixed with reagents and their reaction product is subsequently measured. For example, luciferase is a protein that can be produced by the IVT. The production of luciferase may be detected through its luminescent reaction with luciferin, adenosine triphosphate (ATP), molecular oxygen and Mg2+.36 IVT system product (with luciferase) is brought in contact with the reagent solution (with luciferin, ATP, Oxygen and Mg2+) at the joint of a T-channel as shown in Figure 1-4. The reaction takes place at the interface of the two streams as they are driven toward the other end of T-channel. The product of reaction, bioluminescence emission, can be detected by an external detection system (a CCD camera or a photomultiplier tube). Thus, a thorough and rapid mixing is required to ensure all luciferase involved in the reaction simultaneously. Mixing, however, is hard to achieve in a LOC device, especially for solutions of large molecules with low molecular diffusivity. As pointed out previously, a fluid flow in microchannels of LOC is often laminar, leaving the possibility for mixing to the molecular diffusion only. It takes considerable amount of time to achieve an effective mixing by the molecular diffusion. Take the luciferase detection as an example. Assume the segregated flows of luciferase and luciferin solution are pumped with a mean velocity U 1 cm/s. The T-channel Figure 3-2. Three-dimensional view of fluorescein in a channel by stacking raw images acquired by optical sectioning. The coordinate system is defined as: x in the flow direction, y in the horizontal direction, and z in the vertical direction. (a) fluorescein flow in a regular channel; (b) fluorescein flow in the ridged channel. Raw Inverse Gold MLE Blind MLE MLE Blind MLE image Filter 30 iteration 30 iteration 30 iteration 60 iteration 60 iteration Figure 3-3. Cross-sectional image of a fluorescein flow in ridged channels. The images are reconstructed to represent the yz-plane of Figure 3-3a. The dashed lines indicate the expected shape. From left to right, pictures are the raw image (a) and corrected images using inverse filter (b), Gold algorithm with 30 iterations (c), MLE algorithm with 30 iterations (d), blind MLE with 30 iterations (e), MLE with 60 iterations (f), and blind MLE with 60 iterations (g). light during its passage through the microscope optical lenses. Among optical aberration,64 chromatic aberration is insignificant because band-pass filters are used in the optical system. Optic blurring occurs because each image taken at one focal plane is contaminated with the out- of-focus information from the adjacent planes above and below the examined.60 However, this distortion is reproducible and inherent to the optical system and thus can be mathematically corrected. The optical aberration of light in the optical system can be mathematically expressed as a convolution of the object (i.e., the fluorescein solution in the channel in this case) with a spatial function called the point spread function (PSF), which is the three-dimensional image recorded by the microscopy when the input is a point source.60, 61 As the most fundamental characteristic of an imaging system, PSF can be viewed as the impulse response function of a microscope in the spatial domain (see Appendix A). The resultant 3D image of a point source is thus defined by PSF, hence the intensity at any point in the image is a weighted sum of all the point sources in the channel. A mathematical description of this image formation process is given by a spatial convolution, i.e., a volume integration over space, of the spatial function of fluorescein concentration in the channel and the PSF of the microscope.60 As a result, the images taken from the microscope deviate from the real fluorescence intensity. A deconvolution process must be undertaken to reconstruct the images by deblurring the image. As mentioned above, the other source of the image degradation is photonic and electronic noise during image acquisition. The electronic noise of the CCD camera can be rectified by a bias image, which is taken by the camera when light to the camera is completely blocked. Non- uniformity of light source can be corrected by a flat-field image, which is taken when a fluorescein solution with uniform thickness is illuminated with the UV lamp of the microscope. MLE) algorithm68 69 are classified as constrained iterative algorithms. The object estimation is achieved in a iterative process by imposing various constraints. The positive constraint, a primary and primitive one, ensures the estimate of the object, 6(x, y, z), is always positive. In each iteration, a new estimate of object Ok+1(u, v, w) is calculated using I(u,v,w), H(u,v,w), and Ok(u, v, w) from the last iteration. When the object converges or other criteria reach a preset threshold, such as the maximum number of iterations is reached, the iteration process stops, and the current O(u, v, w) is inverse Fourier transformed to the spatial domain. In practice, O(u, v, w) from the inverse filter deconvolution algorithm is often used as an approximation in the first iteration. The Jansson Van-Cittert, Gold, and MLE algorithms are different in the new object that are generated in each iteration; and they are expressed as (k+1(u, v, w) =K (k)(u,V, w) + W [I(u, ) (k) (, V,). 6(k) (u v, w) (B-7) 6(k+l)(u, v,w)=K6(k) (u,v, ) (u,vw) (B-8) Hj(k) (u, v, w) (k) (u, v, w) and, (k+1) "(k) F________Y__Z__X, Z)((B -V9z) o (x,y,z)= Ko (x, y,z) h^)((kz) i ,) (B-9) (k) X, Z) o (x,y,z) Here K is a normalized constant, and Wis a weight function. In all of these algorithms, the PSF (H(k) or h(k)) remains the same in each iteration. B.3 Blind Deconvolution Blind deconvolution algorithms70 use the same principle as constrained iteration algorithms, except that they also update the PSF in each iteration. This family of algorithms excels when the PSF is unknown or is perhaps not accurately measured. In each iteration Equations B-10, B-11, and B-12 below are paired with Equations B-7, B-8, and B-9, respectively, to compute the PSF and the object. In the first iteration, the initial guess of the object is usually set as the acquired image, and the initial guess of the PSF is simply set as the one from a theoretical model or unity. i(k+1) (u, v, w) = K {(k) (u, v, W) + W' I(, V, w) i(k), V, W). (k) (, v, w)]} (B-10) H(k+)(u', v, w)=K'H(k)(u, v, W) ,vW) (B-1) h(k+l) (X, Z) =K'h(k) (x, y, z) (k)(, y, z)"x i z) (B-12) I//' (x, y,z)6o(k) X, ,Z) channels is described in Chapter 2. Deionized water seeded with submicron latex particles is pumped into a ridged channel, and an electric field is applied on the fluid opposite to the direction of the Poiseuille flow. Time-lapse images of the flow are acquired by a CCD camera, and are overlapped to obtain the pathlines of the micro-particles in the flow. The parameter K is adjusted by changing the amplitude of the imposed electric field. Figure 5-9 shows the variation of recirculation with respect to K in experiment, which agrees fairly well to the numerical predictions (Figure 5-8). Strong recirculation is obtained in flows with parameter K roughly in the range in the neighborhood of 5.8. The recirculation becomes weak as K increases to a large value. It vanishes when K decreases to zero. The minor discrepancy between the CFD simulation and experiments may result from the deformation of channel prototype caused by fabrication, and/or the errors during the analysis. 5.3 Mixing by Recirculation It has been validated both numerically and experimentally that the construction of ridge structures on channel walls can cause flow twisting and yield effective mixing. Similar to flow twisting, flow recirculation also results in stretching and folding of fluid in the ridged channel, and ought to have a potential to improve fluid mixing. In the remaining of this section, a mixing scheme utilizing flow recirculation is discussed in details. It's already known that the addition of an electric field to the Poiseuille flow in a ridged channel leads to the occurrence of recirculation in the flow. To induce recirculation of proper intensity, the pair of forces in the fluid, namely electrokinetic force and the pressure force has to satisfy the requirement obtained in previous section. A continuous application of the electric field, however, will result in dead volume in the recirculation region in the flow, which doesn't help in fluid mixing. Hence a discrete signal, for example a square wave (Figure 5-10), should be applied for fluid mixing. As a result, an unsteady EOF is induced in the ridged channel. 2.3.3 Electrode Printing Electrodes are printed on a plastic thin film using screen printing technique.42 Figure 2-9a shows the drawing for the electrodes compiled in AutoCAD. The dashed lines indicate the outlines of the channels on the plastic part. The electrodes wires are lines of 0.3 mm wide, while the electrode pads (A and B) are circle of 1 mm in diameter. The distance between two electrodes is 3 mm. The pattern is cut in a 0.3 mm thick stainless steel sheet by laser (Global Stencil, Austin, TX), forming a stencil. Conductive ink is obtained by dissolving carbonate paste (BQ225, DuPont, NC) in acetone at a concentration of 0.24 g/ml. An air brush (Badger, Franklin Park, IL) is used to spray the ink onto the plastic film with the electrode stencil firmly pressed against it. After a 2 hour curing in a 70 C oven, the film with the screen printed electrodes is ready for thermal lamination. A picture of the screen-printed electrodes is shown in Figure 2-9b. The thickness of electrodes is about 5 microns. After lamination, two 2-cm long metal wires are glued onto the electrode pads (A and B) using conductive epoxy (ITW Chemtronics, Kennesaw, GA). A picture of the finished micro mixer is shown in Figure 2-10. 2.4 Characterization of Fabrication Process A glass master and an E-form are used in fabricating LOC plastic devices. Ideally, through the E-form (Figure 2-1 lb), micro features in the plastic chip (Figure 2-1 1c), should be identical to those in the glass master (Figure 2-1 la). However, discrepancies exist between the glass master and the plastic replica. To characterize the difference, a Dektak profiler is used to measure the channel depths at 64 different locations in the glass master, the ridge heights at the corresponding locations on the E-form, and the channel depths at the corresponding locations in the plastic chip. manner, as the electro-migration of the ions (toward/away from the wall) is dynamically balanced by the thermal motions in the diffuse layer. The concentration of ions in the diffuse layer follows the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution ScxpRT RT ), (1-1) where 0,, is the electric potential in the EDL induced by the surface charge, co is the concentration far from the surface where 4~, approaches zero, F is the Faraday constant, R is the gas constant, Tis the temperature of the fluid, and z is the valence number of the ions15. For a solution with a symmetric electrolyte, the charge density becomes p,= -2Fzco sinh zF..f SRT ) .(1-2) Coupling Equation 1-2 with the Poisson's equation V20..r = PI s (1-3) where e is the permittivity of fluid, it yields 2 2Fzc sinh zF'4 . V 2 sinhSnh S -RT ) (1-4) The above equation can be simplified from Debye-Hiickel approximation,16 which considers that the potential energy of the ions is small in comparison to their thermal energy in the EDL. As a result, the hyperbolic sine term is approximated by the first perturbation only, S2Fzco zFAf Se RT (1-5) Hence, the resulting expressions for electric potential and charge density are S=-pot Xp Y- S) (1-6) and CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Inspired by the famous talk on miniaturization by Richard Feynman,1 scientists and engineers have developed technologies to allow mechanical devices, chemical and biological sensors and actuators to be integrated onto a small-sized platform over the past 50 years.2 Lab- on-a-chip (LOC) devices are such a miniaturized system that can perform multiple functions for an analytical operation, such as chemical synthesis, extraction, separation, detection and so on.3 The major objective of this thesis is to characterize micro-scale flow recirculation and explore its use in fluid mixing in a LOC device. Before I present the theory, design, and fabrication of the LOC device, the concept and basic knowledge of microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) and lab-on-a-chip, and microfluidics are provided in this introduction. 1.1 Lab-on-a-chip and MEMS MEMS are miniaturized integrated systems that combine electrical and mechanical components with at least one of their dimensions in the micrometer scale. The term MEMS (microsystems technology in Europe, or micromachines in Japan) was defined in 1987,4 when the integrated fabrication of mechanism on silicon was made possible. Ever since then, it has advanced due to the rapid advancement of the integrated circuit (IC) technology, since MEMS uses the modified IC processing techniques that developed in semiconductor industry.5 Originally, MEMS was applied exclusively to silicon-based mechanical applications, which is exemplified by the fact that mechanical applications have dominated the MEMS field in the earlier years. Examples of MEMS device applications include inkjet-printer cartridges, accelerometers, miniature robots, microengines, gyroscopes, micromirrors, fluid pumps, and pressure sensors.6 However, as more realized the coming century would be the age of biotechnology and information technology, MEMS has shift its focus towards new applications n.J A Q ' I I Figure 2-6. Photomask layout of wavy channels. Five wells in the layout are numbered for references in the text. The lengths of the lines connecting wells 1, 2 and 3 to the intersection M, and lines connecting well 4 and 5 to N are all 6 mm. Inset (a) shows the detailed photomask design of a 2D arc channel, whose profile mimics the bottom of ridged channels. s = 21.2/um, r = 40umn, and / = 76.4/um. Inset (b) shows the detailed photomask design of a wavy channel, whose bottom profile is a sinusoidal curve. h = 34.5/um, a = 5.5/um and / = 76.4/,m. Figure 2-7. Wavy channels fabricated on PDMS substrates. The microscopic image is shown in inset. c_ I- -~ V4 = 0 (4-12) For the given solution domain as shown in Figure 4-2a, the resulting non-dimensionalized boundary conditions include the following equations, v~(x r, y) = y(x + y), (4-13) Po (L/2jl)2 p(x- ,y)= p(x + ,y)+ pv o (4-14) t- V ,D walls = 0 (4-15) ,.V//js (4-15) V wallss = V'walls, (4-16) (x r, y)= (x + r, y)- 1, (4-17) and ,Vol, =0 (4-18) where (i, h) are the unit vectors in the tangential and normal directions with the respect to the walls. 4.3 Formulation of Solutions Since q(x, y) is uncoupled from yf(x, y), it can be solved separately from Equation 4-9 with boundary conditions given by Equations 4-17 and 4-18. Subsequently, Vy(x, y) can be obtained by solving Equation 4-12 with the boundary conditions (Equations 4-13 to 4-16). 4.3.1 Electric Potential Using complex functions,102 a general solution to the Laplace equation (Equation 4-9) is written as, (x, y) = Ax + 23[G((r)] (4-19) where 4 = y/2 + ix/2 is a complex variable; 9t and 3 denote the real and imaginary parts of a complex value; A is a real constant; G(,;) is an arbitrary analytical periodic complex function satisfying the periodic boundary conditions in the x-direction G(y/2 +(x- 'r)i/2) afterwards. As K increases toward infinity, the bubble diminishes to the channel boundary and their size approximates asymptotically to zero. Figure 4-15A shows the effect of the scaled wave amplitude (a) on the size of recirculation region in a wavy channel. The Kvalue is set at 2 while h is fixed at 2.84. The result indicates that recirculation occurs when a <1.31, but flow becomes recirculation-free beyond the value. This result agrees with the discussion above on the onset of recirculation: recirculation occurs at small a values, but not at large a values. The maximum size of the recirculation region takes place when a = 1.08. The streamline patterns corresponding to a = 0.31, 0.91, and 1.19 are shown in the insets of Figure 4-15A. The effect of the scaled channel width (h) on the size of recirculation region is also studied (Figure 4-15B). The K value is set at 2 while a is fixed at 0.45. The flow is recirculation-free until h = 2.0. Bubbles rapidly enlarge as h increases, and reaches to the maximum size at h = 2.2. As h further increases, the size of recirculation region slowly decreases and drops asymptotically to zero. 4.5 Summary Using the complex function and boundary integral formulation, an accurate method for obtaining 2D electroosmotic flow in a wavy channel is developed. Effective slipping boundary conditions are employed to decouple the electrostatic and hydrodynamic effects. Because of the flexibility of the boundary integral formulation, this method is shown to be an effective and more accurate alternative to the lubrication theory and perturbation method. Compared to the approximate solutions using the lubrication theory, the restriction of a slow change in the wall charge or geometry is removed in the present formulation so that the effects of arbitrary values of a and h can be investigated. either information related or chemical and biological in nature. As a consequence, more specified terms has emerged in the research field, such as BioMEMS, mechanical MEMS, optical MEMS (or MOEMS), radio frequency MEMS (or RF-MEMS). BioMEMS is an equivalent term to LOC, and has been widely used by researchers from engineering world to emphasize the micro-fabrication techniques. While micro total analysis system (MicroTAS or JITAS), preferred by chemists, is another equivalent term indicating that multiple analytical functional components are integrated onto a single platform to perform a well-defined analysis task. Generally, these terms are interchangeable. In the dissertation, LOC is the term that primarily used. MEMS inherits from integrated circuit (IC) manufacturing technology. The major techniques used in MEMS fabrication include film growth, doping, lithography, etching, dicing, packaging, wet bulk micro-machining, surface micro-machining, and micro-molding.5' 6 While the last three are extensions of IC technology tailored to MEMS fabrication, the others are completely compatible to IC fabrication. Some of the MEMS fabrication techniques are demonstrated in the fabrication of the LOC devices, and will be discussed in details in Chapter 2. Comparing to its macro-scale counterparts, a MEMS device has merits in many aspects due to its small size, such as portability, cost/performance, energy and material consumption, selectivity and sensitivity, redundancy and reproducibility. As to the lab-on-a-chip applications, miniaturization of devices brings additional benefits, including low reagent usage, fast analysis and high throughput. In the past decade, MEMS has proven its success by the rapid expansion of the market size. It has been regarded as one of the fastest growing technology area by market analysts. According to Databeans, a Nevada-based market research firm, the global market for MEMS flow in a 2D wavy channel, the creeping electroosmotic/Poiseuille flow in a slow varying channel doesn't have any backflows, hence no flow recirculation occurs. However in case both pressure and electric filed are imposed simultaneously on the fluid in the ridged channel, flow recirculation takes place around the ridge structures. The flow recirculation is expected to be related to the ratio of electrokinetic force and the pressure force in the flow. Inherited from the study of recirculation in 2D wavy channel, the dimensionless parameter K = PL2/(4;rpvTo) (Equation 4-32), represents the ratio of imposed pressure drop to electric potential difference on the fluid in the ridged channel. K is zero when zero pressure drop is applied, and the electroosmotic flow prevails; K becomes infinity in case that zero electric field is imposed on the fluid flow, hence the pressure flow dominates. With the combination of different P and V, a total of 18 flows of different K are simulated, and the boundary conditions are summarized in Table 5-1. Figure 5-8 illustrates the streaklines in the ridged channels of some cases listed in Table 5- 1. It's clear that the variation of flow recirculation is similar to that observed in a wavy channel. In the two extreme cases (Figures 5-16a and 5-16g), flow recirculation is rarely observed from the streaklines. While in cases where K is a moderate number (Figures 5-16b to 5-16f), the circulating streaklines become obvious, implying the presence of flow recirculation. Based on the simulation results, with current ridged channel geometry, flow recirculation is significant when K is in the range from 1.8 to 20, and it reaches strongest state when K approximates 4.5, where the net flow rate is roughly about zero in the channel. 5.2.5 Experiment Validation To validate the numerical predictions of flow recirculation in ridged channels, a set of experiments are conducted on the ridged channels. The fabrication and parameter of ridged hydraulic diameter is 56 micron. A time varying electric field is imposed by applying a square wave electric potential at the outlet of the mixer and keeping the two inlets grounded. The mixing process of two segregated streams is simulated. The incoming streams, deionized water and a 0.1 mM Rhodamine-B solution are pumped by an average pressure drop of 375 Pa/cm. The diffusion coefficient of Rhodamine-B is set as 3.6x10-10 m2/s. An electric field of mean strength of 272 V/cm is applied. Based on the definition of K in Equation 4-32 the corresponding parameter K is 9.1, roughly in the range where significant flow recirculation would be obtained. The electric field is alternating at the frequency of 1 Hz, and the duty cycle is 50%. Therefore in each cycle the duration for recirculation and feeding phases are 0.5 second each. The fluid density is set as 997 kg/m3, and the fluid kinetic viscosity is 1x10-6 m2/s in the simulation. With the simulation configuration, the criteria for optimal mixing in Section 5.2 are all satisfied. The initial state of simulation is set to be a steady flow where zero electric field is applied. At zero second, the pulsed signal is applied. The fluid flow in the PRM is calculated every 0.1 second by the CFD software, and the simulation stops at 6 seconds, the end of the 6th period. Simulation shows that flow recirculation occurs in the PRM at a frequency of 1 Hz, and the unsteady flow quickly settles at an oscillating pattern as the transient effect decays and becomes negligible. Figure 5-12 shows the typical evolution of the distribution of Rhodamine-B at a cross section over one period. The cross section is located at -1 mm after the merging of two streams, between the 4th and 5th ridge structures (section II in Figure 5-11). Contour lines of Rhodamine- B concentration are calculated and plotted at the cross section views for each frame. Also shown in Figure 5-121is the contour lines in a flow at the cross section of a regular channel (without (A) (a) / (b) o 0.2 0 .5 ... . .. . . ... .. . ... .... ... . 0.1 \ 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 (B) (d) 0.5 ------ --- o 0 .3 ............................ ............. .................. 2 0 .2 ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ..e .... o t1-*****------ --'- ~---^ _.--'--s 0 1 2 3 4 5 h Figure 4-15. Size of recirculation region as a function of a and h. (A) The size of recirculation region as a function of the scaled wave amplitude, a The K value is fixed at 2 while h = 2.84. The streamline patterns of fluid flows in the wavy channel are shown in the inset with a = 0.31 (a), 0.91 (b), and 1.19 (c). (B) The size of recirculation region as a function of the scaled channel width, h. The K value is fixed at 2 while a =0.45. The streamline patterns of fluid flows in the wavy channel are shown in the inset with h = 2.1 (d), 3.0 (e), and 4.8 (f). physically possible in terms of the channel geometry. The curve with circles splits entire parameter space into two zones: a recirculation zone below the curve and a recirculation-free zone between the curve and the solid line. The circles represent the data obtained from the solution. The curve starts from (a = 0, h = 2) and approaches to the physical boundary as h increases. The wavy channel of a = 0.45 and h = 2.84 described in Figures 4-9e and 4-9f does fall in the recirculation zone, consistent with the result shown in Figure 4-13a. Note that the intercept (h0 value when a = 0) of the curve corresponds to a channel of constant cross sectional area, in which the flow velocity at the centerline is zero due to the fact that the maximum velocity of a pressure flow (Umax = PH2/(8k/L)) is equal to the EOF velocity (Ueo = ro/L ). Equating umax to ueo results in h0 = f/K This equation can be used as the starting point of the calculation for the K curves, which separates the recirculation zone from the recirculation-free zone for the given K value. The exploded view of the K curve near the intercept is shown in the inset of Figure 4-13a. The solid line is based on the calculated velocity profile at the neck, while the dashed line is based on the velocity profile at the trough of the wavy channel. They coincide at h = 2, but the onset conditions of recirculation are slightly different, depending on the location and geometry of the channel. As shown in Figure 4-1 Ic, flow recirculation is observed only at the neck, but not at the trough of the channel when a = 0.015, h = 2 with K = 2. As a result, the diagrams in Figure 4-13 are generated by using flow reversal at the neck as the criteria of flow recirculation. Figure 4-13b shows the dependence of the onset of flow recirculation on the applied forces represented by the dimensionless parameter K. When K is small, EOF dominates and it is difficult to have recirculation in the flow. When K is large, pressure flow dominates, recirculation easily occurs. The plot provides a means to determine the geometry and external MICROFLUIDIC MIXING AND ITS USE IN LAB-ON-A-CHIP DEVICES By ZHENG XIA A DISSERTATION PRESENTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL OF THE UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA 2008 St = L2/ I7 (5-5) As the Reynolds number is less than the order of unity in a typical EOF; the second term in the momentum equation can be dropped off. However, the Strouhal number, as the ratio of time scale of EOF to the period of the applied electric field can be large, making the temporal term in the momentum equation dominant. 5.3.2 Pulsed Recirculation The application of a constant pressure and such a pulsed electric field results in a time periodic flow in the ridged channel. Each period consists of two phases: recirculation phase when the electric field is on, and feeding phase when the electric field is off. In the recirculation phase, recirculation occurs in the flow and the fluids in the ridged channel are homogenized due to the actuation; the mixer is active. While in the second phase, the flow restores to laminar and thus the mixer is inactive. During the feeding phase, the mixed fluids are flushed out of the ridged channel, and unmixed fluids are fed into the mixer. The mixing is related to the manner that electric field is applied, namely the magnitude of electric field, the oscillation frequency, the wave form and the duty cycle. The optimization of mixer is not performed in this work, and only guidelines are discussed here. In general the following operation conditions are desired in order to obtain an optimal mixing. Strong recirculation intensity. The stronger the recirculation, the more effective the mixer is. Based on the numerical study of flow recirculation in the ridged channel, the intensity of recirculation depends on the ratio of the external forces imposed on the fluid. The amplitude of the electric signal should be adjusted such that in the recirculation phase, the resulting dimensionless parameter, K, is in the range where significant flow recirculation is obtained. Sufficient recirculation time. The length of the recirculation phase ought to be long enough to ensure a fully development of the flow recirculation in the ridged channel and a Luciferase from IVT A C --------------- | I i 1 bioluminescence B 1 CCD camera Reaction solution luciferinn, ATP, Mg2) Figure 1-4. Schematic of bioluminescence detection in a T-microchannel. Luciferase solution from IVT is pumped into T-channel from inlet A, while reaction solution, including luciferin, ATP, Oxygen, and Mg2+, is pumped from inlet B. Bioluminescent reaction takes place at the interface of the two steams as they flows toward outlet C. (a) - c -- -- .- - -----"- c __--f " 'I,,, ., -. "_ -,,, c ~ r.. C-C -- 7 -.T.-,, --" -...- . -c -- -- - .. :: t ....-' S,' -.-_ *-- - -- . -1 -_-_ _- _ -; -'-,, 'p -f "-~i b ~-%F - - -' a -- - -= -- - (d) -f z =- ~= 1 -~~~5 -i - --- -_-..--__:1- -_ _-_ --''-_-= ..-_- Figure 4-9. Combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure. (a) The velocity profile of an EOF in a wavy channel with channel width h = 2.84 and wave amplitude a = 0.45. (b) The velocity profile of a pressure driven flow in the same channel as in (a). (c-d) The velocity profile (c) and the streamline pattern (d) of a combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure in the same direction. The ratio of the pressure drop to the electric potential difference (K, as defined in the text) is 2. (e-f) The velocity profile (e) and the streamline pattern (f) of a combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure in the opposite direction; K is 2. 95 :-1.1_:-;- ~ ridged channel are counted. The region contains a total of 21838 pixels, as indicated in Figure 5- 16f. Figure 5-17 shows the temporal evolution of intensity histogram profile in the ridge channel in one cycle. One may observe the same trend that has been recognized in Figure 5-16. Without the presence of the recirculation, the histogram profiles possess two large separated peaks, representing the two distinct streams in the flow. During the recirculation phase when the mixer is active, the two peaks move toward each other while their heights grow higher, implying the two streams are better mixed. In the feeding phase when the mixer is inactive, the two peaks move back further apart and the heights go down, implying less mixing in the fluid. The effect of K on the mixing performance of PRM is illustrated by Figure 5-18. By fixing the pressure drop and varying the amplitude of the pulsed electric field, the K varies from 60 to 12. As expected, the closer K approximates to the optimal value (K=4.5) that determined from the CFD simulation, the stronger the flow recirculation occurs in the ridged channel, and the better the mixing performance is. This observation qualitatively agrees with the CFD simulation results of the pulsed recirculation mixer reported previously. 5.6 Summary Flow recirculation is observed in ridged channels. It's induced when an electric field of opposite direction to the pressure drop is imposed to the flow. Commercial CFD simulation software is used to characterize recirculation with respect to the external forces. It's found that recirculation becomes significant only when the external forces (the pressure forces and the electrokinetic force) are comparable. With current ridged channel configuration, significant recirculation is induced in ridged channels when K is in the range from 1.8 to 20, and strongest recirculation occurs when K approximates 4.5. A micromixer that utilizes recirculation to improve fluid mixing is presented. Since a pulsed electric field is required during operation, the novel mixer is referred as pulsed devices and production equipment was worth an estimated $5 billion in 2005, $6.3 billion in 2006, and will be doubled in next five years with an average annual growth rate of more than 20%.7 Among all the commercial products, life science applications make majority part of the 2006 MEMS market, and is expected to continue the domination in 2010.8 Examples of commercial utilization in current market are Nanogen's NanoChip molecular biology workstation,9 Caliper's microfluidic LabChip systems,10 and Bio-Rad's Experion Automated Electrophoresis System.11 1.2 Microfluidics and Electroosmosis Microfluidics refers to principles and methods for controlling and manipulating a small volume of liquids through manifolds of channels with dimensions less than a millimeter.2'12 13 As microfluidics presents itself as a promising technology in the development of MEMS, it has emerged into a fast-growing field that has received intensive attentions from engineers and scientists. Microfluidics has several unique aspects that distinguish it from traditional fluid mechanics, as follows. * In microfluidic flow, the hydraulic diameter of flow ranges from 0.1 micron to 100 micron. As a direct result, the Reynolds number is small, indicating the viscous force is dominant, and laminar flow occurs as it is way smaller than critical Reynolds number for turbulence flow. * The continuum assumption still holds as indicated by the low Knudsen number in microfluidic flow. The Knudsen number is defined as Kn = A/L, where A is the mean free path of the fluid molecules and L is the characteristic channel dimension. In liquid, the mean free path is approximated by the lattice space of the molecules.14 The resulting Knudsen number for microfluidic flow is small, well within the range of continuum flow assumption. For example, the lattice spacing for water is on the order of 0.1 nm, and the corresponding Knudsen number for a microfluidic flow ranges from 10-3 to 106. * Electrokinetic effects at the interface between liquids and solids become significant because of the large surface-to-volume ratio in microfluidic flows. Electric double layer (EDL) is induced in a very thin layer of fluid adjacent to solid surface, and the ions in EDL can move at the presence of an external electric field. As a result, an electroosmotic flow (EOF) forms in the fluid, and this phenomenon was first described by F. F. Reuss in his ..........( e ................................................... Figure 4-11. Streamline patterns of fluid flows in wavy channels. The scaled channel width (h) = 2.84, and the scaled wave amplitude (a) = 0.45. The ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic force, K= 0 (a); K=1.0 (b); K=1.1 (c); K= 1.2 (d); K= 1.25 (e); K =2 (f); and K = 4.2 (g). Two periods are plotted for (c) to show the onset of recirculation in the neck region, but not in the trough region yet. ~-----=---~---~------= cc ol It ~c To recapitulate, the problem of solving the harmonic and biharmonic equations has been reduced to solving a set of one-dimensional periodic functions. They can be solved efficiently by using highly accurate spectral (Fourier series) method. The solution to the set of the complex periodic functions 0(x)={ Gl'(x), GP(x), Rc'(x), RP(x), QP(x), and Q (x) can be sought in the form of Fourier series as (x) = 0 m exp(-imx) (4-45) where Om ,={gm,g,r r', ,qm,,q,} are the respective Fourier coefficients. In the absence of singularity of the field variables, the series solution converges exponentially. Hence only 10-40 terms of the Fourier series are typically needed, depending on the values of (K, a, h), to ensure that the error in the solutions for the electric and velocity fields do not exceed a predefined threshold value (10-8 in this study). For the infinite interval of integration defined in Equations 4-20, 4-37 and 4-38, the interval is split into three parts: (-oo,-Lint), [-Lint, Lint], and (Lint, oo). The middle interval, [-Lint, Lint], is bounded so that it can be accurately and efficiently evaluated using the built-in adapative quadrature routine based on Simpson's rule in the MATLAB. In the present study, Lint = 1,0247t and a tolerance of 10-8 are used. For the unbound intervals, the details of the evaluation of the velocity are illustrated below. From Equation 4-35 u(x, y) can rewritten as u(x, y)= 2By K y2 + 1 intu()d 47r 2z i (4-46) where the integrand is int u(=) = z (-) P )( '(;) + 2 P int< Z)2 Z2--o z z2z +(( )-z)2 () (()2 2 '() =(y+ix)2 (a) h = 0.6 (e) h =0.6 (b) h = 1 -- --(f) h = 1 E _ (c) h = 2.5 (g) h = 2.5 5-~ (d) h =5 (h) h = 5 S- --- a Figure 4-6. Effect of the scaled channel width on the velocity field in a wavy channel (K=0). (a- d) The streamline patterns of EOF. The scaled channel width, h, changes from 0.6 to 5 while the scaled wave amplitude, a, is fixed at 0.5. (e-h) The velocity profiles of EOF corresponding to (a-d). -- c ai a a 1-- function of ln(Pe) in Figure 5-6B. A linear relation is found between the amplification and the logarithm of Peclet number of flow. As the Peclet number increases, the ridged channel becomes less effective in fluid mixing. This can be explained by that a flow with a larger Peclet number becomes more dominated by the streamwise convection, and the mixing effect from flow twisting becomes negligible. 5.2.4 Flow Recirculation Intensity To induce flow recirculation, pressure and electric field are simultaneously imposed on the ridged channel model. In the simulation, the pressure gradient is applied by fixing the pressure at inlet zero and imposing a finite pressure, P, at the outlet, so that the pressure flow is from right to left in the top view, as illustrated in Figure 5-7a. The electric field is imposed by setting a finite electric potential, V, on the inlet of ridged channel model, while keeping the outlet grounded all the time. The resulting EOF in the channel is from left to right in the top view of the flow (Figure 5-7b). In the simulation, the electroosmotic mobility is set as 4.8x10-8 m2/s. CFD-VIEW is used to analyze the flow field and visualize the calculated streaklines in the flow. Particle streaks were calculated from the simulated flow field. A total of 141 streaklines are generated in the flow, each of which represents the trajectory of a massless particle travels with the flow. The particles are released from an array of locations near the ridge structure (Figure 5-4c). The streaklines are calculated by connecting 500 segments of 1-millisecond travel distance. Figure 5-7 shows the simulated trajectories and flow velocity profiles in a Poiseuille flow and an electroosmotic flow in the ridged channel. Quadratic velocity profile is identified in the pressure driven flow, so are the front of the streaklines. In the EOF, the velocity profile has a much more uniform profile, so that all the particles travel about equal distance with the same time lapse. No flow recirculation is observed in both flows. Similar to what we predicted in a Figure 5-1. Microscopic image of microbead traces in a flow in ridged channels. The beads circulating around the ridges are the evidence of flow recirculation in ridged channels. The ridged channel has depth of 40 micron and width of 110 micron. ~-'--.-- - 71 ..- 71 j_ i~r-i 1a I- - Figure 5-2. Plot of streamline and velocity profile of flows in the wavy channel calculated by CFD-ACE+ simulation and the analytical solution. Flow recirculation is observed from (a) the simulated streamline by CFD-ACE+ (a) and from (c) the streamline plot by the analytical solution developed in Chapter 4. Back flow is also observed in the velocity profiles of flow by CFD-ACE+ simulation (c) and the analytical solution (d). The two sets of results agree very well. The wavy channel has wavelength of 76.4 gm, wave amplitude of 5.5 gm, and width of 29 im. External pressure and electric field are applied at the boundary such that K=2. CHAPTER 5 PULSED RECIRCULATION MIXER 5.1 Introduction As discussed in Chapter 4, flow recirculation is induced when a pressure drop and an electric potential difference are imposed in opposite directions on a fluid flow in a wavy channel. It's found that the recirculation is due to the competence of electrokinetic force and pressure force in the flow, and strong flow recirculation is obtained in the fluid flow when their magnitudes are comparable, or the dimensionless parameters related to forces (K, the ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic body force) is in certain range related to the channel geometry. Similar recirculation phenomenon is observed in a ridged channel, which also has a varying cross section. By properly adjusting the external forces, flow recirculation is illustrated in a ridged channel by the traces of micro particles that seeded in the fluid flow (Figure 5-1). Note that recirculation in the ridged channel also depends on channel geometries and the forces, like the case in a wavy channel. This phenomenon has a promising potential in enhancing the fluid mixing in microfluidic systems. A micro mixer, referred hereafter as pulsed recirculation mixer (PRM), utilizes flow recirculation as described in this chapter. The mixing mechanism is discussed and validated using CFD simulations. Fluid mixing experiments are also conducted in a prototype PRM to verify the simulation findings. The outline of this chapter is as follows. The characteristics of flow recirculation in ridged channels are first discussed and investigated using commercial CFD simulation package. The simulation results are verified by experiments of seeded fluid flow in ridged channels. A mixer based on recirculation is presented and its mixing scheme is discussed. Following numerical A fluid phenomenon, flow recirculation, is explored for microfluidic mixing in lab-on-a- chip devices. Flow recirculation is induced when electroosmotic flow and Poiseuille flow are present in ridged channels. To understand flow recirculation, electroosmotic flow (EOF), a phenomenon resulting from the interaction of an external electric field and surface free charges in the electric double layer, is studied. The channel geometry variation represented by a wavy channel between a plane wall and a sinusoidal wall is investigated. An analytical solution to the EOF in the wavy channel using complex function theory is presented. Flow recirculation regions are predicted when an adverse pressure gradient is added to an EOF in the wavy channel. The onset condition of flow recirculation and the size of the recirculation region are determined. It is found that they are dependent on dimensionless parameters related to forces and the channel geometry. Experimental results are presented to validate the theoretical prediction and the analytical solution. After investigating flow twisting and flow recirculation, a novel microfluidic mixer is developed. It consists of a portion of ridged channels and two integrated electrodes. With the application of a pulsed electric filed, periodic flow recirculation is induced, and served as the secondary mixing mechanism in the mixer in addition to the flow twisting effect. To facilitate the mixer design, CFD software is employed to simulate the recirculation in the ridged channel and optimize the operation parameters for the mixer. An effective and efficient mixing performance from the proposed mixer is predicted by CFD simulation. Mixing experiments are also carried out on a prototype mixer to validate the mixing performance. The experimental results agree qualitatively with the CFD numerical results. 39. D. Sinton, Microfluidics andNanofluidics, 2004, 1, 2-21. 40. Y. N. Xia and G. M. Whitesides, AnnualReview ofMaterials Science, 1998, 28, 153-184. 41. D. C. Duffy, J. C. McDonald, O. J. A. Schueller and G. M. Whitesides, Anal Chem, 1998, 70, 4974-4984. 42. C. E. Walker, Z. Xia, Z. S. Foster, B. J. Lutz and Z. H. Fan, Electroanalysis, 2008, 20, 663-670. 43. TOPAS COC A clearly extraordinary polymer, http://www.topas.com/products- topas_coc. 44. J. G. Santiago, S. T. Wereley, C. D. Meinhart, D. J. Beebe and R. J. Adrian, Experiments in Fluids, 1998, 25, 316-319. 45. S. Devasenathipathy, J. G. Santiago, S. T. Wereley, C. D. Meinhart and K. Takehara, Experiments in Fluids, 2003, 34, 504-514. 46. I. Glasgow, S. Lieber and N. Aubry, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 4825-4832. 47. C. H. Chen, H. Lin, S. K. Lele and J. G. Santiago, JFluidMech, 2005, 524, 263-303. 48. B. He, B. J. Burke, X. Zhang, R. Zhang and F. E. Regnier, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 1942- 1947. 49. S. K. Yoon, M. Mitchell, E. R. Choban and P. J. Kenis, Lab Chip, 2005, 5, 1259-1263. 50. R. F. Ismagilov, A. D. Stroock, P. J. A. Kenis, G. Whitesides and H. A. Stone, ApplPhys Lett, 2000, 76, 2376-2378. 51. J. I. Molho, A. E. Herr, B. P. Mosier, J. G. Santiago, T. W. Kenny, R. A. Brennen, G. B. Gordon and B. Mohammadi, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 1350-1360. 52. Y. Wang, Q. Lin and T. Mukherjee, Lab Chip, 2004, 4, 453-463. 53. S. V. Ermakov, S. C. Jacobson and J. M. Ramsey, Anal Chem, 1998, 70, 4494-4504. 54. L. L. Shultz-Lockyear, C. L. Colyer, Z. H. Fan, K. I. Roy and D. J. Harrison, Electrophoresis, 1999, 20, 529-538. 55. M. S. Munson and P. Yager, Anal Chim Acta, 2004, 507, 63-71. 56. D. S. Kim, S. H. Lee, T. H. Kwon and C. H. Ahn, Lab Chip, 2005, 5, 739-747. 57. C. Neils, Z. Tyree, B. Finlayson and A. Folch, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 342-350. 58. D. Therriault, S. R. White and J. A. Lewis, NatMater, 2003, 2, 265-271. the channel width and wave amplitude on the flow field are studied, and the similarity between the electric field and EOF velocity is examined. More interestingly, recirculation regions are predicted when a pressure gradient of sufficient strength the in opposite direction is added to the EOF in a wavy channel. The presence of the flow recirculation region is experimentally verified. The solution is further systematically examined over a large range of physical and geometrical parameters to determine the onset condition of the recirculation region. The onset condition is presented in the form of a (the ratio of the wave amplitude to the wavelength) as a function of h (the ratio of the channel width to the wavelength) for a given K (the ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic force). The size and shape of the recirculation region are also found to be dependent on K, a and h. The conclusions of recirculation in wavy channels will be used as guidelines in the investigation of recirculation in ridged channels and the design of micromixer in Chapter 5. 4.2 Governing Equations Let's consider a two-dimensional wavy channel of infinite length between a top flat plate and a bottom sinusoidal plate, as shown in Figure 4-1. The average width of the channel is H, the wave amplitude at the bottom wall is A, and the wavelength is L. Using the Cartesian coordinate system in Figure 4-1, the channel walls is expressed asy = H (top flat wall), and y = -A cos(27r x/L) (bottom sinusoidal wall). The top and the bottom walls are both stationary. An electric field is applied along the channel, and the average electric potential increase over one wave length is (D (i.e., EOF from the right to the left). The pressure drop over one wave length isP,. The flow is assumed to be steady, incompressible, and Newtonian. The fluid has density p, kinematic viscosity v, and electric permittivity e. The characteristic potential at the CHAPTER 3 DECONVOLUTION MICROSCOPY FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION* 3.1 Introduction As explained in Chapter 1, microfluidic systems are widely used in chemical analysis and biological applications, and a thorough mixing of reagents is often required. To evaluate the efficiency of fluid mixing, flow visualization is often used. Direct flow visualization is also important for studying microflow properties, investigating flow behavior, and verifying computational fluid dynamics simulations.39 The primary methods used for microscale flow visualization are particle-based flow velocimetry, such as particle image velocimetry (PIV)44 and optical imaging techniques enabled by fluorofores or dyes. PIV measures the velocity in a two- dimension plane due to small depth-of-field of a high numerical aperture lens,45, thus it is difficult to be used for visualization of a complex, three-dimensional flow. Optical imaging is a flow visualization method to study fluid motions inferred from color or fluorescence intensity.39 It has been used to study mixing in microflows,18'20'23,24,35, 37, 46-50 diffusion in a curved channel,51' 52 and the shape of injected samples at an intersection.53' 54 The majority of these optical imaging techniques acquire images from the top of a microchannel, visualizing a two-dimensional flow. Interpretation is thus straightforward when the vertical gradient components (from the top to the bottom of the channel) of flow variables are negligible. However, such top-view images can be easily misinterpreted if the flow is three-dimensional.55 For instance, two vertical layers of unmixed flows could be mistaken as a mixed flow because an image acquired from the top may show uniform fluorescent signals across the channel. Examples of a three-dimensional flow include chaotic mixing due to transverse flows19' 20 and * Part of this chapter has been published in "Deconvolution Microscopy for Flow Visualization in Microchannels", Analytical Chemestry, 2007, 79(6): p. 2576-2582. (a) 0 :v '1ii:::::::L 0.-. 12th 24th r~ ~ ~ 7:h ~, \ 1 st (b) 1st 12th 36th -1 24th 36th 48th Figure 3-4. Top view and cross section views of a Poiseuille flow in ridged channels. (a) Layout of ridged channel and the expanded view of ridges in the channel. Two channels connecting to wells 1 and 2 merge at the intersection, M. (b, c) Cross-sectional views (yz-planes) of the fluorescein flow in ridged channel at different locations. Two streams of fluorescent solution and water are pumped into the channel simultaneously from wells 1 and 2, with equal flow rate (2.3 cm/s). The location for each cross- sectional view is indicated at the bottom. Views from the raw image stack are presented in (b) and views from the deconvoluted image stack are in (c). I . Mrarah -- ~ --lC~~ L~ L-c Figure 4-1. Two-dimensional wavy channel between a flat plate at the top and a sinusoidal plate at the bottom. Also indicated are the coordinate system and the channel geometries, including wavelength L, wave amplitude A, and average channel width H. (a) p(x 7, y) #(x- 7.y) (b) C Y (x + r, y) A(x+r, y) A D 4'- P(x) Figure 4-2. Boundary conditions and contour path used in the analytical solution. (a) One period of a wavy channel with boundary condition at both ends. (b) Contour path for the Cauchy integral over one period of a wavy channel. 1 * the acceleration of the wall, * the tangential pressure gradients along the boundary, * the tangential electric field along the boundary, or * the tangential velocity gradient of the boundary. The first and the last sources are zero when the boundary is stationery in most situations, such as the EOF in the wavy channel discussed in this work. Hence, vorticity is generated at the surface by the induced pressure gradient and the wall electric field, and they generate equal amount but opposite tone of vorticity, resulting the net production of vorticity zero at the channel surface. Hence the vorticity inside the channel remains zero. When the boundary is moving, the vorticity generation at the channel wall surface has to include the tangential acceleration and the tangential velocity gradient. For example in the EOF with the effective slipping boundary condition, the Helmholtz-Smoluchowski velocity is assumed at the edge of the electric double layer, and the entire fluid is assumed electrically neutral (pe = 0). The wall pressure gradient and the velocity gradient of boundary become the sources of vorticity in EOF. Again, their vorticity production cancels each other and zero vorticity enter into the EOF from the channel surface. As a result, vorticity is zero everywhere in the EOF. 4.4.5 Electroosmotic Flow with Pressure Gradients The discussion in Sections 4.4.1-4.4.4 pertains to an electroosmosis-driven flow with no external pressure applied. When an external pressure drop is present, the resulting flow can be viewed as superposition of a Poiseuille flow and the EOF, since the governing equation in a creeping flow is a linear ordinary differential equation. Figure 4-9a shows the velocity profile of an EOF in a wavy channel of scaled width h = 2.84 and scaled wave amplitude a = 0.45 while the velocity profile of the pressure driven flow in the same channel is illustrated in Figure 4-9b. size is about 40 pm (the ridge height on the E-form), the mold shrinkage reasonably explains the difference of 0.31 pm between the E-form and the plastic substrate. 2.4.3 Comparison of Plastic Chip and Glass Master The difference between the channels on the plastic chip and those on the glass master is a combined result of E-form expansion and plastic chip shrinkage. Figure 2-14 shows the histogram of the difference between the two sets of measurements. The average of the difference is 0 pm, indicating that the plastic replica is statistically same as its master. The variance of the difference is 0.14 pm, which is larger than either variance values in previous comparisons. This is because the electroplating and the hot embossing process both contribute to the discrepancy between the master and the replica. Due to the inevitable errors in the electroplating and the hot embossing process, the plastic chip generally has slightly different dimensions from its glass master. Sometimes the difference can be negligible, which is the case above where the E-form expansion balances the plastic shrinkage. However in most cases, it turns out the opposite. Hence a prudential control the etching depth in the fabrication of glass master is preferred, so that the final plastic product results with a desired depth. At the same time, optimization the fabrication process is needed to minimize the variation in the difference between the plastic chip and the glass master. This, however, is beyond the scope of the thesis work. transversal secondary flow and thus enhance mixing.30 Ultrasonic waves from piezoelectric transducers were used by Yaralioglu et al. to generate acoustic stirring of the fluid perpendicular to the flow direction in a microchannel.23 A simple active mixing approach by alternatively electroosmotically pumping fluids has been reported by various groups.18'29 Grumann et al. proposed a novel fluidic concept to drastically accelerate mixing process in batch-mode using centrifugal forces.21 In general, active mixers usually yield a better mixing result, in comparison to the passive microfluidic mixers. However, the design, fabrication and the control of the additional forces are always more challenging. 1.4 Objectives and Study Overview The major objective of this research is to study and develop a novel microfluidic mixer based on the phenomenon that fluid flow circulates in a three dimensional (3D) channel driven by pressure force and electrokinetic force. To evaluate the efficiency of microfluidic mixers, I also develop deconvolution microscopy for visualizing flows in microchannels and an analytical method to study flow recirculation in wavy channels. The remaining part of this proposal is organized as follows. In Chapter 2, the design and fabrication process of LOC devices are presented. The construction of a 3D ridge structure in microchannels is explained. A microfluidic testing device is fabricated on a plastic plate using hot embossing method. A two dimensional (2D) wavy channel is fabricated on poly-dimethylsiloxane (PDMS) substrate for studying the mechanism and property of flow recirculation. Finally, a micro mixer utilizing the recirculation is manufactured on plastic substrate. The characterization of hot embossing process is also reported. Chapter 3 describes deconvolution microscopy, an equivalent yet less expensive alternative to confocal microscopy, in evaluation of fluid mixing. The theory is discussed. An investigation has a typical width of h 100 um; the typical kinematic viscosity of fluid is v 10-5 cm2/s. The resulting Reynolds number is thus L7i v ~ 1 and the flow dominated by viscous force. The molecular diffusivity of proteins is very low with the typical value of 107 cm2/s. The corresponding Peclet number of the flow (Pe Uh/D), which is the ratio of molecular convection time to molecular diffusion time, turns out to be on the order of 105, implying that the convection of the proteins is much faster than the molecular diffusion. The typical time for molecules diffusing half of the width of the channel, h2/D, can be as long as 1000 seconds. A microfluidic mixer is thus in demand to enhance fluid mixing in LOC devices. A principle of mixing two segregated streams is to increase interfacial area and at the same time reduce diffusion distance. The key to achieve effective mixing in a laminar flow is thus to induce transverse motion, namely by stretching and folding fluid flow at cross section of the channel. The past decade has seen a booming number of reports in scientific literatures describing new approaches following this strategy. In general, these approaches can be categorized into two strategies. One is passive mixing technique, in which the transverse motion is induced as a sole result of channel geometry. The other is active mixing technique, in which the transverse motions result from interaction of an additional force with driving force (pressure force for Poiseuille flow or electrokinetic force for electroosmotic flow). In general, passive mixers are always preferable, as they require no additional forces. Sophisticated design and complicated fabrication, however, are always demanded to achieve effective and efficient mixing in the passive mixers. Various mixing designs have been reported by many research groups. Rohr fabricated a monolithic mixer by polymerizing porous monolithic polymers in the microchannels, and used it to mix aqueous solutions of two fluorescent dyes.25 Burghelea added a small amount of flexible polymers to working liquids, beam splitter, and an emission filter (HQ535/50, Chroma Technology), and then is collected by a scientific-grade, cooled CCD camera (2184 x 1472 pixels, Apogee, Auburn, CA). The CCD pixel size is 6.8 ym x 6.8 im. 3.3.2 Optical Sectioning and Image Reconstruction Prior to the acquisition of sample images, both bias and flat-field images are collected for optical calibration of the microscopy. The bias image is taken with the camera shutter closed; it is used for rectifying the noise level of the CCD camera. The flat-field image is taken when a fluorescein solution is contained between two flat glass slides and illuminated with the UV light; it is then used for calibrating the uneven UV illumination and the variation in the sensitivity of different regions of the camera. To collect images via optical sectioning, the microscope objective lens is moved in steps of 1 am along the optical axis to acquire consecutive images. A total distance of 80 ym is displaced in the optical axial direction, ensuring a full sampling of the 40-um-deep channel and enough information from the out-of-focus neighboring region. The stack of 80 images, together with the bias and the flat-field images, are then imported into AutoDeblur and AutoVisualize (AutoQuant Imaging Inc, Troy, NY) for deconvolution analysis. A variety of deconvolution algorithms are studied, including the inverse filter, Gold, MLE, and blind MLE. A Dell computer with Intel Pentium 4 processor (OptiPlex GX270) is used for computation. 3.4 Results and Discussion 3.4.1 Optical Sectioning As discussed in Section 3.2, the sampling interval in the optical axis must meet the Nyquist sampling theorem defined by Equation 3-1. The sampling distance in the axial direction (Az) is 1 im, which is the adjustment step of the microscope objective lens. Using 520 nm for the emission wavelength of fluorescein, 0.5 for NA of the lens used, and 1 for the refractive index of (a) h = 0.6 (c) h = 2.5 TI ''111' h=5 (e) top wall Iei 4 One Period (-s to +1c) * I ~83 (f) bottom wall h =0.6 = I /~ h=2.5 h = 1 O3 2 P1 0 1 One Period (-s to +n) Figure 4-4. Effect of the channel width on the electrical potential distribution in a wavy channel. (a-d) Equipotential line patterns. The channel width, h, changes from 0.6 to 5 while the wave amplitude, a, is fixed at 0.5. (e-f) The electric field strength at the top flat wall (e) and the bottom wavy wall (f) at each channel width. For clarity, data points on the lines are removed. 0 0.2 LU ." -_ L 2 3 4 I ( (b) h = 1 (iv) y ...^y .id Figure 5-5. Simulation of fluid mixing in a ridged channel by CFD-ACE+. Two streams, solution of 0.1 mM specimen and water, are introduced into the ridged channel (a) at a preset flow rate. The cross sectional views with contour lines for specimen concentration in the ridged channel are shown in (c). The locations of the cross sections (top to bottom) are labeled in (a) as (i) to (iv). In this case, the flow rate is set at 5 nL/s. The Peclet number of the flow is 450, and the Reynolds number is 0.15. Also shown is a segment of regular channel (b) of same length and same etching depth but with no ridge structures. With same incoming streams, the cross sectional views of the regular channel are displayed in (d). Blue stream is water and red stream is specimen solution. The increment of the contour levels is 5 nM. The flat-field image also compensates for any variation in the sensitivity of different pixels in the CCD camera. These images will also be used in the deconvolution process to reduce both photonic and electronic noises. 3.2.3 Deconvolution A variety of deconvolution algorithms has been developed to remove the blurring and noise in images acquired via optical sectioning. These algorithms can be classified into three groups: inverse filter,65 constrained iteration,66-69 and blind deconvolution.70 Two implementations of the constrained iteration are investigated, namely the Gold algorithm67 and the maximum likelihood estimation (MLE) by Richardson and Lucy68' 69. Mathematical description of each algorithm is summarized in Appendix B, and the advantages and disadvantages of each method, as well as essential references, are listed in the Table 3-1. These methods are used and compared for microflow visualization, and then the best one is chosen for the mixing study as explained in the Results and Discussion. 3.3 Experimental Methodology 3.3.1 Experimental Setup A plastic device (Figure 2-4) with ridged channels is fabricated as described in Section 2.1. It is connected to a syringe pump (KDS 100, KD Scientific, Holliston, MA) via the Nanoport kit (Upchurch, Oak Harbor, WA). Fluorescein solution (1 aM) is pumped into the device at a preset flow rate (5.2 uL/min., or 2.3 cm/s based on the cross-sectional area). Using the hydraulic diameter of the channel and 3.3 x 10-6 cm2/s as the diffusion coefficient of fluorescein,71 the Peclet number19 of this flow is 3.9 x 103. The device is placed on the sample stage of an inverted microscope (IX51, Olympus America Inc, Melville, NY), which is equipped with a 75W xenon lamp (U-LH75X). A 20x objective lens (Olympus) with a numerical aperture of 0.5 is used. The light pass through an excitation filter (HQ480/40, Chroma Technology, Rockingham, VT), a 5.3.1 Formulation of Unsteady EOF Formulations of the equations of the motion of fluid flow in pulsed recirculation mixer is similar to that provided in Section 4.2, except the addition of the temporal term due to the application of a periodic electric field. The formulas include continuity equation, momentum equation and Poisson equation. After the application of the effective slip boundary condition and the normalization by x* = TL = FL/(70o) t* = t/ P = /Po The formulas become V*. = 0 (5-1) (Re.St) +Re f* (V*) = -4r2KV*p* +V*2r* a9t (5-2) v*2 = 0 (5-3) In the formulas, x, V, t, p, q are the position vector, velocity vector, time, pressure, and electric potential, and they are non-dimensionalized using P, L, r7, (g, r, which are the characteristic applied pressure, the characteristic length scale of the ridged channel (the distance between the periodic ridge), the electroosmotic mobility at the boundary (defined in Equation 1- 21), the characteristic applied electric potential, and the characteristic time scale (the period of the applied pulsed electric field), respectively. The Laplacian and the gradient operators are also normalized using L. K is the same dimensionless number defined in Equation 4-32, Re and St are the Reynolds and Strouhal numbers respectively, and defined as Re =r,/v (5-4) channel, a 3D geometry resulting from isotropic etching as discussed previously, makes it difficult to characterize the location, size, and intensity of recirculation. Although the deconvolution microscopy can be used to visualize flow in such ridged channel as demonstrated in Chapter 3, it is limited to measure the scalar properties in the flow, such as the fluorescence intensity. Particle image velocimery (PIV)38 39 is thus used for characterizing flow recirculation. The ridged channel must be simplified to a 2D channel in order to use PIV because of its limited capability in measuring the velocity component along the camera axis. As a result, the width of a ridged channel is made much larger than the depth, as shown in Figure 2-5a, so that the geometric effect from side walls then becomes negligible at the center. This channel is then rotated by 900; the channel width thus becomes along the optical axis direction. The resulting 2D ridged channel is illustrated in Figure 2-5b (stereo view and top view). The ridges on the bottom of the ridged channel are transferred to the side wall of the 2D ridged channel. A wavy channel is similar to the 2D ridged channel, and shown in Figure 2-7, except the ridge features on the side wall are replaced by sinusoidal waves. The 2D ridged channel and the wavy channels are fabricated on a PDMS substrate by soft lithography.40' 41 Experiments in the wavy channel are carried out and results are presented in Chapter 4. 2.2.1 Design The photomask layout for the wavy channels is drawn using AutoCAD, and the schematic is shown in Figure 2-6. 40 ym wide continuous lines connect wells 1, 2, and 3 to M, wells 4 and 5 to N. Between M and N are the patterns for a 2D ridged channel (Figure 2-6a), a wavy channel (Figure 2-6b), and three other types of channels. Drawing of the photomask is sent to Photo Sciences to generate a 4-inch square dark-field chromium photomask. a.. . . ..... .... . . . I . . . . . . . 0 b 2 8 10 Figure 4-14. Size of recirculation region as a function of K. The size is represented by the ratio of area of recirculation region to the total area of the wavy channel. The wavy channel is the same as in Figure 11, with h = 2.84 and a = 0.45. The labels (a-g) correspond to the flow patterns in Figure 11, with K = 0 (a); K =1 (b); K= 1.1 (c); K = 1.2 (d); K = 1.25 (e); K =2 (f); and K = 4.2 (g). 0.5 O 0.4 N C, - 0.3 o = 0.2 I- I- " 0.1 'b .o NO ^ a ^b 'b m yr Y 5 Z 0* 0* '* * (plastic chip depth) (glass master depth) Figure 2-14. Histogram of the differences between the channel depths on the plastic chip and the channel depths on the glass master. The profile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. Pe2 .(1-14) Substitute the charge density term in Equation 1-9 with Equation 1-14. The momentum equation in x direction yields _u2 1 dp e 2 surf +-E 8y2 pv dx pv X 82 2 (1-15) where Ex = -Vx, is a constant in a uniform electric field along the channel surface. To solve Equation 1-15, the following boundary conditions are applied: * The electric potential is known at the Stem plane u"rf y=0,h =po't (1-16) * The geometric symmetry of flow field implies that the velocity gradient is zero at the centerline of the channel, i.e., au C-" =0 y y=h/2 (1-17) * The flow is non-slipping at the stern layer, namely, Syo-,h = 0. y=0,h (1-18) Integrate twice on the both sides of Equation 1-15, and make use of Equations 1-16 to 1- 18. The velocity is solved as u(y) = -2 ) sE 4pv dxL[\ 2, pv (1-19) Recall the expression of ,,f in Equation 1-6, the result above can be rewritten as u(y) 1 d/p (h/ -h)2 + Ept E (e -Yl1) 4pv Ldx 2 pv (1-20) The resulting flow, as expressed in Equation 1-20, is the combination of a pressure driven flow and an EOF. The first term in Equation 1-20 represents the flow in the channel due to the presence of pressure drop, while the second term stands for the electroosmosis. By introducing an electroosmotic mobility term 5y 5r 5 P <'Ppm \- \*VV 8' (E-form height) (glass master depth) Figure 2-12. Histogram of the differences between the ridge heights on the E-form and the channel depths on the glass master. The profile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. 10 4- a 8 E a) 4 E 0 2 O* 1 I I I I IZ IY IY I I (plastic chip depth) (E-form height) Figure 2-13. Histogram of the differences between the channel depths in the plastic chip and the ridge heights on the E-form. The profile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. o~b dP oP o~ .... To my parents To Xinyi and our lovely son Chase 811Sa plat (ioncorduIcttl Anode * - CWahode Figure 1-2. Electroosmotic flow between two parallel infinite glass plates with thin EDL. The velocity profile in bulk flow is uniform, while in the diffuse layer it is an exponential curve. 5 4 y 3 Ad 2 1 0.99 0.4 0.6 u reoE Figure 1-3. Velocity profile of an electroosmotic flow in the region close to the glass surface. Stmrn plane Y 0 I ID I I. I 0 I. 0 0 i I IBulkflow Stern layer Diffuse Layer Figure 1-1. Electric double layer (EDL) and electric potential profile in EDL. The electric double layer locates next to the wall surface, and consists of Stern layer and diffuse layer. Figure 5-18. Effect of parameter K on mixing performance of pulsed recirculation mixer. Images are taken at the 5th ridge. The electric field is 0, 666, 1000, and 1333 V/cm, respectively; and the operation parameter K is (a) inf, (b) 30, (c) 20, and (d) 15. The ratio of standard deviation of intensity to mean is 0.34, 0.32, 0.19 and 0.12, respectively. thus to induce chaos and achieved efficient mixing in microchannels.26 Flow split-and- recombine was applied in Shonfeld's design of micro mixer to shuffle fluid flows, and resulted in a high mixing efficiency.28 Chung et al. presented a simple yet effective mixing chamber to allow fluids self-circulate for mixing enhancement29 Spiral 2D and 3D microchannels were fabricated to utilized the transverse dean flows resulting from centrifugal effects to enhance mixing.27,33 Thorough mixing may also be obtained by creating non-uniformity on channel surface.34,35 One noticeable design, reported by Whiteside's group, is to create an additional herringbone structures at the bottom of channel to achieve chaotic mixing.19 In general, for passive micro mixers, extra features have to be added to regular channel geometries, therefore the design is complex and the fabrication processes are stringent. Passive mixers, as an extra component to microfluidic systems, results in flow rate reduction in original flow. For example, the addition of herringbone structures at channel floors causes more pressure drop over the microchannel as fluids are pumped through, hence more pressure head is required to maintain same flow rate when a passive mixer is installed. Active mixers use various forces, such as mechanical force, Lorentz force, magnetic force, centrifugal force, and acoustic force, to interact with driving force of a fluid flow, and therefore induce transverse flows at cross sections of microchannels. As a result, additional energy is consumed in active mixer other than driving fluid in microfluidic system. Magnetic force was exploited by Suzuki et al. to facilitate mixing.32 They embedded magnetic beads in microchannels and applied appropriate temporal variations of magnetic field to stir the fluids. Bau et al. developed a magneto-hydrodynamic stirrer in which a flow was stirred by Lorentz force induced by the coupling of alternating electric field and a static magnetic field.31 Electro- hydrodynamic force as a result of an electric field, was used by Moctar et al. to produce Abstract of Dissertation Presented to the Graduate School of the University of Florida in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy MICROFLUIDIC MIXING AND ITS USE IN LAB-ON-A-CHIP DEVICES By Zheng Xia August, 2008 Chair: Z. Hugh Fan Cochair: M. Sheplak Major: Mechanical Engineering Because of the difficulty to achieve convective mixing in laminar flows, microfluidic mixers have been developed in this work to rapidly homogenized fluids in lab-on-a-chip devices. To evaluate the efficiency of fluid mixing in a mixer, direct visualization of microflows is needed. Hence a technique of coupling a conventional optical microscope with a computational deconvolution algorithm is explored to produce images of three-dimensional flows in plastic microfluidic channels. The approach, called deconvolution microscopy, is achieved by (1) optically sectioning the flow in the microchannel by collecting a series of fluorescence images at different focal planes along the optical axis, and (2) removing the out-of-focus fluorescence signal by the deconvolution method to reconstruct a corrected three-dimensional concentration image. Different convolution algorithms for a uniform concentration test case are compared, and then deconvolution microscopy is demonstrated in flow visualization in microfluidic channels. Deconvolution microscopy has been demonstrated in evaluating the fluid mixing by the flow twisting in ridged channels. An agreement has been found between the theoretic results and experimental results. (a) (b) Microchannel : Microscope Adjusting objective focal plane Image acquired by CCD Figure 3-1. Optical sectioning process for visualization of a microfluidic flow. (a) A device with a microchannel is placed on the microscope stage. The objective lens of an inverted microscope is moved in the axial direction to obtain the image corresponding to a focal plane at a desired depth of microchannel. The image is captured by a CCD camera. (b) A stack of images are acquired by adjusting the objective lens in a discrete step, Az, through the entire channel depth of the microchannel. There are more blurs in the images that are out of focus. Table 5-1. Case No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12* 13 14 15 16 17 18 Summary of boundary conditions for CFD simulation. P (Pa) V (Volt) K Flow rate (nL/s) 75 0 00 -9.97 100 20 30.9 -10.07 90 20 27.8 -8.89 80 20 24.7 -7.71 70 20 21.6 -6.53 60 20 18.5 -5.35 50 20 15.4 -4.18 40 20 12.3 -3.00 30 20 9.3 -1.8 25 20 7.7 -1.23 20 20 6.2 -0.64 15 20 4.6 -0.05 10 20 3.1 0.53 5 20 1.5 1.11 6 20 1.9 1.00 7 20 2.2 0.88 8 20 2.5 0.77 0 20 0 1.69 Related figures Figure 5-7a Figure 5-8a Figure 5-8b Figure 5-8c Figure 5-8d Figure 5-8e Figure 5-8f Figure 5-8g Figure 5-7b air, the axial resolution of the microscope (rz) is calculated to be 2.9 inm. Therefore, our 1 experiment condition meets the requirement of Nyquist sampling theorem, A < -r . 2 Fluorescein solution is first pumped into the microchannel from both inlets (wells 1 and 2 in Figure 2-2). As a result, uniform fluorescence signals should be observed in the mixing channel connected to well 3. This serves as a test case to assess the accuracy of each algorithm. Using the optical sectioning described in Section 3.3, images are acquired in the region with smooth surfaces and in the region with ridges. Figure 3-2 shows the three-dimensional view of the fluorescein flow in the channel by stacking all images together in sequence. Figure 3-2a is from the region with smooth surfaces while Figure 3-2b is from the region with ridges. Although both images roughly indicate the image of the fluorescein flow (i.e., the shape of the channel), blurred edges and a hazy background are obvious. As explained in Section 3.2, these optical distortions result from the aberration of the fluorescent emission, and photonic and electronic noise. Therefore, deconvolution is performed to rectify these effects, obtaining the correct fluorescent intensity values at the points in the channel and reconstructing the actual image of the corresponding fluorescein flow. 3.4.2 Deconvolution As discussed previously in Section 3.2, the bias image and the flat-field image are first obtained for optical calibration of the microscopy. These calibration images, as well as the image stack in Figure 3-2a, are imported into the deconvolution software, AutoDeblur. The raw images are offset by the bias image and then normalized by the flat-field images. A variety of deconvolution algorithms are then investigated for reconstructing the images, including the inverse filter, Gold, MLE, and blind MLE algorithms mentioned above. A theoretical PSF (see v-v nrA tsrcv~y Figure 5-8. Streaklines of massless particles convected by flow in ridged channels at different K. TheKin each case is (a) 30.9, (b) 21.6, (c) 12.3, (d) 6.2, (e) 4.6, (f) 3.1, and (g) 1.9, respectively. P00- - ==Nor 3 DECONVOLUTION MICROSCOPY FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION ..............................51 3 .1 In tro d u ctio n ................................................................................................................. 5 1 3.2 T heoretical B ackground.......................................................................... ....................52 3.2.1 O optical Sectioning ........................................ ................. .... ....... 53 3.2.2 Convolution ..................................................................... ......... 53 3.2.3 D econvolution ......................... ....... ....... .. ........ ......... 55 3.3 E xperim mental M methodology ..................................................................... ...................55 3.3.1 E xperim mental Setup .............. .. ........... .... .. .. ...................... .............. 55 3.3.2 Optical Sectioning and Image Reconstruction ................................................. 56 3.4 Results and Discussion .................................... ..... .......... ......... .... 56 3.4.1 O optical Sectioning ........................................ ................. .... ....... 56 3.4.2 Deconvolution ............................... .......... ........ ............... 57 3.4.3 M ixing in Ridged Channel .................................. .....................................58 3 .5 S u m m a ry ..................................................................................................................... 6 0 4 ELECTROOSMOTIC FLOW IN WAVY CHANNELS.......................................................65 4 .1 In tro d u ctio n ................................................................................................................. 6 5 4.2 G governing E equations ................................................ ................. .... ...... 67 4 .3 F orm ulation of Solutions ......................................................................... ...................70 4.3.1 E electric Potential .......................... .............. ................. .... ....... 70 4 .3 .2 Stream F unction .......... .................................................................. ......... ....... 72 4.4 Results and D discussion .................................... ..... .......... ...... ........ .. 76 4.4.1 E electric Potential .......................... .............. ................. .... ....... 76 4.4.2 Flow V velocity ......................... ................. .................................... ........ .... 77 4.4.3 Similarity between Flow Velocity and Electric Field ........................................79 4.4.4 V orticity in Electroosm otic Flow .................................... .................................... 80 4.4.5 Electroosmotic Flow with Pressure Gradients ................................................. 81 4.4.6 O nset of R circulation ............................................................................. ...... 83 4.4.7 R ecirculation Pattern and Size.......................................... ........... ............... 86 4 .5 Su m m ary ............................................................................... 87 5 PULSED RECIRCULATION MIXER ................................................... ..................101 5.1 Introduction ....................................... .......................................................10 1 5.2 Recirculation in Ridged Channels ............................................................................ 102 5.2.1 V alidation of CFD -A CE+....... ........................ ..................... ............... 102 5.2.2 M odeling of Ridged Channels...................... .... ....................... ............... 103 5.2.3 Poiseuille Flow in Ridged Channels.................................... ................. 104 5.2.4 Flow R ecirculation Intensity ........................................ .......................... 106 5.2.5 Experim ent V alidation...................... ........................ ................. ............... 107 5.3 M ixing by R ecirculation ...................... .. .. ......... .. ............................. ............... 108 5.3.1 Form ulation of U nsteady EOF ........................................ ........................ 109 5.3.2 Pulsed R ecirculation ...................... .. .. ......... .. ......................... ............... 110 5.4 Simulation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer ......... ......................... ............... 111 5.5 Experiment Validation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer .................... .................14 6 of mixing in a Poiseuille flow in ridged channels is carried out to illustrate the use of the deconvolution microscopy. An analytical solution to EOF with finite pressure in 2D wavy channels is developed in Chapter 4. The method is used in exploring recirculation in a wavy channel, which is expected to help understanding recirculation in a 3D ridged channel. The effects of channel geometry on the electric field, streamline pattern, and flow rate are studied. The similarity between the electric field and the EOF velocity is also discussed. With a parametric study of recirculation in wavy channel, the onset conditions and the characteristic of flow recirculation in the wavy channels are investigated. Chapter 5 includes results of a numerical study of recirculation in ridged channel using CFD simulation. A micro mixer, called pulsed recirculation mixer, is designed based on the study of flow recirculation in the ridged channel. Periodic recirculation is induced in the mixer to enhance fluid mixing. Experiments are carried out in a prototype mixer fabricated following the procedure in Chapter 2. The experiment results agree well with theoretical predictions by CFD simulations. The conclusions are drawn and the future directions are discussed in Chapter 6. Figure 5-16. Temporal variation of fluid mixing in PRM during one cycle. The pulsed electric field has frequency of 1 Hz and duty cycle of 50%. The operation parameter K used in this mixing test is 20. Images are taken at the first ridge structure at 0.2 second interval. Without the application of the pulsed electric field, the fluid appears steady and the top view is shown in (f). The yellow line encloses area that used to generate the intensity histogram profile. recirculation phase feeding phase 1,500. 1,000 500 1000 Time 1500 2000 2500 Pixel Value Figure 5-17. Temporal evolution of intensity histogram profile in the ridge channel in one cycle. The pulsed electric field has frequency of 1 Hz and duty cycle of 50%. The operation parameter K used in this mixing example is 20. Appendix A) is used except for the blind MLE algorithm, which does not require an estimate of the PSF. Figure 3-3 shows the images after deconvolution using different algorithms. Each image is constructed as a yz-plane, the cross-sectional view of the regular channel in Figure 3-3a. Due to isotropic etching, a D-shaped channel should be observed in the yz-plane as indicated by the dashed line in each image. As explained in Table 3-1 and in the literature,60 the inverse filter deconvolution causes many artifacts as expected (Figure 3-3b). The strips in Figure 3-3c indicate that the Gold algorithm exhibits slow convergence and suffers from constructive artifacts.60 The results in Figures 3-3d to 3-3g suggest that the MLE and blind MLE deliver better results, even though they take longer computation time (-30 minutes compared to a few seconds on same computer). When the number of iterations is increased from 30 to 60, the blind deconvolution algorithm generates even better results than the MLE. The corrected image after 60 iterations of the blind MLE is the closest to the channel geometry. Therefore, the blind MLE deconvolution algorithm is chosen to study mixing as follows. It's noted that even after reconstruction with the blind MLE deconvolution, fluorescence is still found outside of the channel geometry, indicating the incomplete rectification of optical distortion. The commercial deconvolution software used in current study is not tailored for microfluidic studies. A better deconvolution algorithm can be developed for visualizing microfluidic flows in microchannels. 3.4.3 Mixing in Ridged Channel To study mixing, fluorescein solution is now introduced into the microchannel at well 1 of the device in Figure 3-4a, and pressurized water is introduced at well 2. The two streams merge at the intersection M, travel through the ridges in the channel, and finally exit at well 3. The top view of the first 36 ridges is in Figure 3-4a. LIST OF REFERENCES 1. R. P. Feynman, Microelectromechanical Systems, Journal of 1992, 1, 60-66. 2. M. Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC Press, 2001. 3. P. S. Dittrich, K. Tachikawa and A. Manz, Editon edn., 2006, vol. 78, pp. 3887-3908. 4. S. A. Vittorio, MicroElectroMechanical Systems (MEMS), http://www.csa.com/discoveryguides/mems/overview.php. 5. M. J. Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication: the science of miniaturization, 2nd ed. edn., CRC Press LLC, Boca Raton, 2002. 6. W. Trimmer, A Tutorial on Micromechanics and MEMS, http://home.earthlink.net/-trimmerw/mems/tutorials.html, Accessed 12/12, 2006. 7. R. Chan, MEMS market to double in five years, Databeans says, http://www.digitimes.com/bits_chips/a20061102PR204.html, Accessed 12/12, 2006. 8. A. McWilliams, Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Technology: Current And Future Markets, http://www.electronics.ca/reports/mems/technology.html. 9. M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of optics : electromagnetic theory ofpropagation, interference and diffraction of light 7th edn., Cambridge University Press, New York, 1999. 10. D. A. Agard, Y. Hiraoka, P. Shaw and J. W. Sedat, Method CellBiol, 1989, 30, 353-377. 11. D. A. Agard and J. W. Sedat, Nature, 1983, 302, 676-681. 12. H. A. Stone and S. Kim, Aiche Journal, 2001, 47, 1250-1254. 13. H. A. Stone, A. D. Stroock and A. Aj dari, Annu Rev FluidMech, 2004, 36, 381-411. 14. R. F. Probstein, Physicochemical hydrodynamics : an introduction, 2nd edn., Wiley- Interscience, Hoboken, N.J., 2003. 15. E. W. Weisstein, Maxwell Distribution, http://mathworld.wolfram.com/MaxwellDistribution.html 16. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West and F. J. Holler, Fundamentals of analytical chemistry, 5th ed edn., Saunders College Pub, New York, 1988. 17. C. H. Amon, A. M. Guzman and B. Morel, Phys Fluids, 1996, 8, 1192-1206. 18. I. Glasgow and N. Aubry, Lab on a Chip, 2003, 3, 114-120. CHAPTER 4 ELECTROOSMOTIC FLOW IN WAVY CHANNELS* 4.1 Introduction Flow recirculation is observed in EOF in ridged channel, which is promising in enhancing fluid mixing in microchannels. In order to apply such recirculation in microfluidic mixing, we ought to explore and understand the properties of EOF in the ridged channel. However the flow is three-dimensional and difficult to deal with. A sinusoidal wavy channel is chosen as the simplified form of the ridged channel. It is a 2D channel with a varying channel cross section area; yet the variation is simple. So in this chapter, I shift focus temporarily from the ridged channel to the wavy channel. An analytical solution to EOF in a wavy channel is developed. Using the exact solution, EOF can be analytically studied and hence the flow recirculation can be consequently characterized. Once the parametric study of recirculation in the wavy channel is completed, the focus is shifted back to the recirculation in the ridged channel and the development of a microfluidic mixer using recirculation. Electroosmotic flow, a surface phenomenon, has been investigated in this research and explored for its use in fluid mixing in microfluidic systems. As pointed out in Chapter 1, the Reynolds number of an EOF is typically less than unity. As a result, EOF is often in the regime of a creeping flow, thus governed by the Stokes equation.72 The velocity profile of an EOF in a microchannel of a constant cross-sectional area (e.g. a channel between two parallel flat plates) is a uniform, plug-like shape, which is different from the parabolic profile in a Poiseuille flow. EOF in microfluidic devices has been studied by many research groups.51'73-81 In these studies, SPart of this chapter has been accepted to publish in "Electroosmotically driven creeping flow in a wavy microchannel", Microfluid Nanofluid, in press, DOI10.1007/s10404-008-0290-8. |

Full Text |

PAGE 1 1 MICROFLUIDIC MIXING AND ITS US E IN LAB-ON-A-CHIP DEVICES By ZHENG XIA A DISSERTATION PRESENTED TO THE GRADUATE SCHOOL OF THE UNIVERSITY OF FLOR IDA IN PARTIAL FULFILLMENT OF THE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA 2008 PAGE 2 2 2008 Zheng Xia PAGE 3 3 To my parents To Xinyi and our lovely son Chase PAGE 4 4 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS My utmost gratitude goes to my PhD advisor, Dr. Hugh Fan for allowing me to join his lab, for his expertise, guidance, and most of a ll, for his patience. Without his support and his guidance, I wouldn't perform and fini sh this dissertation work. I am also greatly indebted to my committee members, Dr. Mark Sheplak, Dr. Renwei Mei, Dr. Lou Cattafesta and Dr. Ranganathan Narayanan for their valuab le suggestions on my dissertation. My thanks and appreciation goes to my form er lab colleagues, Dr. Qian Mei for her continuous presence whenever a discussion is need ed, Carl Fredrickson for his readiness to help on device fabrication, Dr. Champak Das for his con tinual encouragement in all these years of my PhD work. I also want to express my gratitude to the fellow graduate students Ruba Khnouf, Karthik Pitchaimani, Jacqueline Viren, Cesar Mo reira, Pan Gu, undergraduate students Fernando Tavares, Corey Walker, Andrew Simon, Aus tin Gispanski, and post-doc colleagues Dr. Alexander Stoyanov, Dr. Jiyou Zhang, Dr. Hong Chen for the wonderful time I spent with them in the lab. Their help made my work much smoother. And then there are other people who have made Gainesville a very special place over these years. They are Chao Cao, Liqun Xu, Jun Li u, Xiaomin Lu and Heshan Lin, Kun Chen and Zhenzhen Zhang, Mingzhen Bao, Yingyan Lou, Lu Ma, Jianlin Li, Jiejin Zhang, Lezhou Zhan and Anna Leung, Yingling Huang and Wenqia ng Tian, Hong Wang, Qi Song, and Yawei Li. Finally, I would like to thank my parents whos e love is boundless, for traveling across the Pacific and be on my side in this most glorious moment of my life. I thank my wife, Xinyi who has stood beside me and encouraged me constantl y. My most special thanks go to my newborn baby, Chase for giving me happiness and joy every day and night. To my precious family, I dedicate this dissertation. PAGE 5 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS page ACKNOWLEDGMENTS...............................................................................................................4 LIST OF TABLES................................................................................................................. ..........8 LIST OF FIGURES................................................................................................................ .........9 LIST OF SYMBOLS................................................................................................................ .....12 ABSTRACT....................................................................................................................... ............14 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................16 1.1 Lab-on-a-chip and MEMS................................................................................................16 1.2 Microfluidics and Electroosmosis....................................................................................18 1.2.1 Electric Double Layer.............................................................................................19 1.2.2 Electroosmosis........................................................................................................21 1.3 Microfluidic Mixing........................................................................................................ .24 1.4 Objectives and Study Overview.......................................................................................28 2 DEVICE DESIGN AND FABRICATION............................................................................33 2.1 Ridged Channel............................................................................................................. ...33 2.1.1 Design................................................................................................................... ..34 2.1.2 Photolithography....................................................................................................35 2.1.3 Electroplating.........................................................................................................35 2.1.4 Hot Embossing.......................................................................................................36 2.1.5 Bonding..................................................................................................................36 2.2 Wavy Channel............................................................................................................... ...36 2.2.1 Design................................................................................................................... ..37 2.2.2 Soft Lithography.....................................................................................................38 2.2.3 Bonding..................................................................................................................39 2.3 Micro Mixer................................................................................................................ ......39 2.3.1 Device Design........................................................................................................39 2.3.2 Fabrication of Plastic Substrates............................................................................39 2.3.3 Electrode Printing...................................................................................................40 2.4 Characterization of Fabrication Process...........................................................................40 2.4.1 Comparison between Glass Master and E-Form....................................................41 2.4.2 Comparison between E-Form and Plastic Chip......................................................41 2.4.3 Comparison of Plastic Chip and Glass Master.......................................................42 PAGE 6 6 3 DECONVOLUTION MICROSCOPY FO R FLOW VISUALIZATION..............................51 3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................... ........51 3.2 Theoretical Background....................................................................................................52 3.2.1 Optical Sectioning..................................................................................................53 3.2.2 Convolution............................................................................................................53 3.2.3 Deconvolution........................................................................................................55 3.3 Experimental Methodology..............................................................................................55 3.3.1 Experimental Setup................................................................................................55 3.3.2 Optical Sectioning and Image Reconstruction.......................................................56 3.4 Results and Discussion.....................................................................................................56 3.4.1 Optical Sectioning..................................................................................................56 3.4.2 Deconvolution........................................................................................................57 3.4.3 Mixing in Ridged Channel.....................................................................................58 3.5 Summary.................................................................................................................... .......60 4 ELECTROOSMOTIC FLOW IN WAVY CHANNELS.......................................................65 4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................... ........65 4.2 Governing Equations........................................................................................................67 4.3 Formulation of Solutions..................................................................................................70 4.3.1 Electric Potential....................................................................................................70 4.3.2 Stream Function......................................................................................................72 4.4 Results and Discussion.....................................................................................................76 4.4.1 Electric Potential....................................................................................................76 4.4.2 Flow Velocity.........................................................................................................77 4.4.3 Similarity between Flow Velocity and Electric Field............................................79 4.4.4 Vorticity in Electroosmotic Flow...........................................................................80 4.4.5 Electroosmotic Flow with Pressure Gradients.......................................................81 4.4.6 Onset of Recirculation............................................................................................83 4.4.7 Recirculation Pattern and Size................................................................................86 4.5 Summary.................................................................................................................... .......87 5 PULSED RECIRCULATION MIXER................................................................................101 5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................... ......101 5.2 Recirculation in Ridged Channels..................................................................................102 5.2.1 Validation of CFD-ACE+.....................................................................................102 5.2.2 Modeling of Ridged Channels..............................................................................103 5.2.3 Poiseuille Flow in Ridged Channels.....................................................................104 5.2.4 Flow Recirculation Intensity................................................................................106 5.2.5 Experiment Validation..........................................................................................107 5.3 Mixing by Recirculation.................................................................................................108 5.3.1 Formulation of Unsteady EOF.............................................................................109 5.3.2 Pulsed Recirculation.............................................................................................110 5.4 Simulation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer.....................................................................111 5.5 Experiment Validation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer..................................................114 PAGE 7 7 5.5.1 Experiment Setup.................................................................................................114 5.5.2 Experiment Results and Analysis.........................................................................114 5.6 Summary.................................................................................................................... .....116 6 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS...............................................................131 6.1 Conclusions................................................................................................................ .....131 6.2 Future Directions.......................................................................................................... ..132 6.2.1 Deconvolution Algorithm.....................................................................................132 6.2.2 Optical Sectioning for Periodic Flow...................................................................133 6.2.3 Optimization of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer........................................................134 6.2.4 Analytical Solution of EOF in Irregular Channel.................................................134 APPENDIX A POINT SPREAD FUNCTION.............................................................................................138 B DECONVOLUTION ALGORITHMS.................................................................................141 B.1 Inverse Filter............................................................................................................. .....141 B.2 Constrained Iterative Deconvolution.............................................................................141 B.3 Blind Deconvolution......................................................................................................142 C SOLUTION TO ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND STREAM FUNCTION.........................143 C.1 Electric Potential Solution.............................................................................................143 C.2 Stream Function Solution...............................................................................................143 LIST OF REFERENCES.............................................................................................................147 BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH.......................................................................................................153 PAGE 8 8 LIST OF TABLES Table page 3-1 Comparison of d econvolution algorithms..........................................................................61 5-1 Summary of boundary conditions for CFD simulation....................................................118 PAGE 9 9 LIST OF FIGURES Figure page 1-1 Electric double layer (EDL) and el ectric potential profile in EDL....................................30 1-2 Electroosmotic flow between two parallel infinite glass plates with thin EDL.................31 1-3 Velocity profile of an electroosmotic fl ow in the region close to the glass surface..........31 1-4 Schematic of bioluminescence detection in a T-microchannel..........................................32 2-1 Creation of ridged channels through isotropic etching......................................................43 2-2 Photomask layout of a T-channel......................................................................................43 2-3 Fabrication process of plastic LOC devices.......................................................................44 2-4 Plastic device with 6 channels...........................................................................................44 2-5 The 3D ridged channels and 2D simplified form of ridged channels................................45 2-6 Photomask layout of wavy channels..................................................................................46 2-7 Wavy channels fabricat ed on PDMS substrates................................................................46 2-8 Photomask layout of a pulsed recirculation mixer.............................................................47 2-9 Layout and microscopic image of electrodes.....................................................................47 2-10 Plastic device with a pulsed recirculation mixer................................................................48 2-11 Glass master, the E-form and a plastic chip used in the work...........................................48 2-12 Histogram of the differences between the ridge heights on the E-form and the channel depths on the glass master....................................................................................49 2-13 Histogram of the differences between the channel depths in the plastic chip and the ridge heights on the E-form...............................................................................................49 2-14 Histogram of the differences between the channel depths on the plastic chip and the channel depths on the glass master....................................................................................50 3-1 Optical sectioning process for visu alization of a microfluidic flow..................................62 3-2 Three-dimensional view of fluorescein in a channel by stacking raw images acquired by optical sectioning..........................................................................................................63 3-3 Cross-sectional image of a fluorescein flow in ridged channels........................................63 PAGE 10 10 3-4 Top view and cross section views of a Poiseuille flow in ridged channels.......................64 4-1 Two-dimensional wavy channel between a flat plate at the top and a sinusoidal plate at the bottom.................................................................................................................. ....89 4-2 Boundary conditions and contour path used in the analytical solution.............................89 4-3 Effect of the scaled wave amplitude on the electric potential distribution in a wavy channel........................................................................................................................ .......90 4-4 Effect of the channel width on the electri cal potential distribution in a wavy channel.....91 4-5 Effect of the scaled wave amplitude on the velocity field in a wavy channel...................92 4-6 Effect of the scaled channel width on the velocity field in a wavy channel......................93 4-7 Flow rate as a function of the rati o of wave amplitude to channel width..........................94 4-8 Similarity between the electric fiel d and the velocity field of an EOF..............................94 4-9 Combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure....................................................95 4-10 Images of microbead flow in a wavy ch annel in a microfabricated PDMS device...........96 4-11 Streamline patterns of fluid flows in wavy channels.........................................................97 4-12 Velocity profiles at the neck as a function of K .................................................................98 4-13 Flow recirculation diagram for various scaled wave amplitude ( ), scaled channel width ( h ), and the ratio of pressure force to electrokinetic force ( K )................................98 4-14 Size of recirculation region as a function of K ..................................................................99 4-15 Size of recirculation region as a function of and h .....................................................100 5-1 Microscopic image of microbead trac es in a flow in ridged channels.............................119 5-2 Plot of streamline and velocity profil e of flows in the wavy channel by CFD-ACE+ simulation and the analytical solution..............................................................................119 5-3 Comparison of electric potential and stream function data in flows in wavy channels by CFD-ACE+ simulation and the analytical solution....................................................120 5-4 Simulation model used for simu lating flows in ridged channel......................................120 5-5 Simulation of fluid mixing in ridged channels by CFD-ACE+.......................................121 5-6 Simulated mixing performance of pulsed recirculation mixer........................................122 PAGE 11 11 5-7 Top views of streaklines of massless part icles convected by flows in ridged channels..122 5-8 Streaklines of massless particles convected by flow in ridged ch annels at different K ...123 5-9 Flow patterns in a ridged channel made on plastic substrates.........................................124 5-10 Pulsed electric signal ap plied in PRM for induction of periodic recirculation................124 5-11 Simulation model for pulse recirculation mixer..............................................................125 5-12 Temporal variation of Rhodamine-B distri bution at a cross sec tion of the periodic recirculation mixer over one period.................................................................................126 5-13 Evolution of the Rhodamine-B concentr ation variation in th e fluid in a PRM...............126 5-14 Experiment setup for the fluid mixing of Rhodamine-B solution and DI water in a prototype PRM.................................................................................................................127 5-15 Comparison between the flow in the inactiv e mixer and the flow in the active mixer....128 5-16 Temporal variation of fluid mixing in PRM during one cycle........................................129 5-17 Temporal evolution of intensity histogram profile in the ridge channel in one cycle.....129 5-18 Effect of parameter K on mixing performance of pul sed recirculation mixer.................130 6-1 Roadmap of research work on the devel opment of the pulsed recirculation mixer.........136 6-2 Microscopic images of fluid flow in periodic channels of different profiles..................137 A-1 Plot of point spread functi on in an octant of 3D space....................................................139 A-2 Airy disk, plot of PFS at the plane of z = 0......................................................................139 A-3 Plot of PSF on a 2D plane along z axis............................................................................140 PAGE 12 12 LIST OF SYMBOLS A Wave amplitude of wavy channel c specimen concentration D Hydraulic diameter of ridged channel E Electric field F Faraday constant h Scaled channel width, 2 HL H Average Width of wavy channel I Pixel intensity Imaginary part of a complex value K Dimensionless parameter represen ts ratio of pressure force to electrokinetic body force Kn Knudson number L Characteristic length scale of microc hannel (wavelength for wavy channel, periodic distance for ridged channel) n Refractive index of media n Unit vectors normal to microchannel walls NA Numerical aperture of objective lens p Pressure P0 Characteristic applied pressure Pe Peclet number R Universal gas constant Real part of a complex value Re Reynolds number St Strouhal number t Time PAGE 13 13 tUnit vectors tangential to microchannel walls T Temperature V Velocity vector z valence number Scaled wave amplitude, 2 AL Variance of specimen concen tration at a cross section Electric permittivity Complex variable pot Zeta potential, electric potential at Stern plane Electroosmotic mobility d Debye length Light wavelength Kinematic viscosity Complex variables Electric potential Density e Electric charge density Characteristic time scale of pulsed electric field 0 Characteristic applied electric potential Stream function Vorticity PAGE 14 14 Abstract of Dissertation Pres ented to the Graduate School of the University of Florida in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy MICROFLUIDIC MIXING AND ITS USE IN LAB-ON-A-CHIP DEVICES By Zheng Xia August, 2008 Chair: Z. Hugh Fan Cochair: M. Sheplak Major: Mechanical Engineering Because of the difficulty to achieve convec tive mixing in laminar flows, microfluidic mixers have been developed in this work to ra pidly homogenized fluids in lab-on-a-chip devices. To evaluate the efficiency of fluid mixing in a mixer, direct visualization of microflows is needed. Hence a technique of coupling a conven tional optical microscope with a computational deconvolution algorithm is explored to produce im ages of three-dimensional flows in plastic microfluidic channels. The approach, called deconvolution microscopy, is achieved by (1) optically sectioning the flow in the microchannel by collecting a series of fluorescence images at different focal planes along the optical axis and (2) removing the out-of-focus fluorescence signal by the deconvolution method to reconstruct a corrected three-dime nsional concentration image. Different convolution al gorithms for a uniform concentra tion test case are compared, and then deconvolution microscopy is demonstrated in flow visualiza tion in microfluidic channels. Deconvolution microscopy has been demonstrated in evaluating the fluid mixing by the flow twisting in ridged channels. An agreement ha s been found between the theoretic results and experimental results. PAGE 15 15 A fluid phenomenon, flow recircul ation, is explored for microfluidic mixing in lab-on-achip devices. Flow recirculation is induced wh en electroosmotic flow and Poiseuille flow are present in ridged channels. To understand flow recirculation, electroos motic flow (EOF), a phenomenon resulting from the interaction of an external electric field and surface free charges in the electric double layer, is studied. The channel geometry variation represented by a wavy channel between a plane wall and a sinusoidal wall is investigated. An analytical solution to the EOF in the wavy channel using complex function theo ry is presented. Flow recirculation regions are predicted when an adverse pressure gradient is added to an EOF in the wavy channel. The onset condition of flow recircula tion and the size of the recirculation region are determined. It is found that they are dependent on dimensionless pa rameters related to forces and the channel geometry. Experimental results are presented to validate the theoretical prediction and the analytical solution. After investigating flow twisti ng and flow recirculation, a novel microfluidic mixer is developed. It consists of a portion of ridged ch annels and two integrated electrodes. With the application of a pulsed electric fi led, periodic flow r ecirculation is induced, and served as the secondary mixing mechanism in the mixer in addition to the flow twisting e ffect. To facilitate the mixer design, CFD software is employed to si mulate the recirculation in the ridged channel and optimize the operation parameters for the mixer. An effective and efficient mixing performance from the proposed mixer is predic ted by CFD simulation. Mixing experiments are also carried out on a prototype mixer to valida te the mixing performance. The experimental results agree qualitatively with the CFD numerical results. PAGE 16 16 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Inspired by the famous talk on mi niaturization by Richard Feynman,1 scientists and engineers have developed technologies to allo w mechanical devices, ch emical and biological sensors and actuators to be in tegrated onto a small-sized platform over the past 50 years.2 Labon-a-chip (LOC) devices are such a miniaturized system that can perform multiple functions for an analytical operation, such as chemical synthe sis, extraction, separati on, detection and so on.3 The major objective of this thesis is to characterize micro-scale fl ow recirculation and explore its use in fluid mixing in a LOC device. Before I pr esent the theory, design, and fabrication of the LOC device, the concept and basi c knowledge of microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) and lab-on-a-chip, and microfluidics ar e provided in this introduction. Equation Chapter 1 Section 1 1.1 Lab-on-a-chip and MEMS MEMS are miniaturized integrated system s that combine electrical and mechanical components with at least one of their dimensions in the micrometer scale. The term MEMS (microsystems technology in Europe, or micr omachines in Japan) was defined in 1987,4 when the integrated fabrication of mechanism on silicon was made possible. Ever since then, it has advanced due to the rapid adva ncement of the integrated circ uit (IC) technology, since MEMS uses the modified IC processing technique s that developed in semiconductor industry.5 Originally, MEMS was applied exclusively to silicon-based mechanical applications, which is exemplified by the fact that mechanical applications have dominated the MEMS field in the earlier years. Examples of MEMS device a pplications include inkj et-printer cartridges, accelerometers, miniature robots, microengines, gyroscopes, micromirrors, fluid pumps, and pressure sensors.6 However, as more realized the coming century would be the age of biotechnology and information technology, MEMS ha s shift its focus towards new applications PAGE 17 17 either information related or chemical and bi ological in nature. As a consequence, more specified terms has emerged in the research field, such as BioMEMS, mechanical MEMS, optical MEMS (or MOEMS), radio frequenc y MEMS (or RF-MEMS). BioMEMS is an equivalent term to LOC, and has been widely used by researchers from engineering world to emphasize the micro-fabrication techniques. While micro total analysis system (MicroTAS or TAS), preferred by chemists, is another equiva lent term indicating that multiple analytical functional components are integrat ed onto a single platform to perform a well-defined analysis task. Generally, these terms are interchangeable. In the dissertation, LOC is the term that primarily used. MEMS inherits from integrated circuit (IC) manufacturing technology. The major techniques used in MEMS fabrication include f ilm growth, doping, lithography, etching, dicing, packaging, wet bulk micro-machining, su rface micro-machining, and micro-molding.5, 6 While the last three are extensions of IC technology tailored to MEMS fabrication, the others are completely compatible to IC fabrication. Some of the MEMS fabr ication techniques are demonstrated in the fabrication of the LOC devices, and will be discussed in details in Chapter 2. Comparing to its macro-scale counterparts, a MEMS device has merits in many aspects due to its small size, such as portability, cost/performance, energy and material consumption, selectivity and sensitivity, redundancy and reproducib ility. As to the labon-a-chip applications, miniaturization of devices brings additional benefits, including lo w reagent usage, fast analysis and high throughput. In the past decade, MEMS has proven its success by the rapid expansion of the market size. It has been regarded as one of the fast est growing technology area by market analysts. According to Databeans, a Nevada-based market research firm, the global market for MEMS PAGE 18 18 devices and production equipment wa s worth an estimated $5 bill ion in 2005, $6.3 billion in 2006, and will be doubled in next five years with an average annual growth rate of more than 20%.7 Among all the commercial products, life scien ce applications make majority part of the 2006 MEMS market, and is expected to continue the domination in 2010.8 Examples of commercial utilization in cu rrent market are Nanogens NanoChip molecular biology workstation,9 Calipers microfluidic LabChip systems,10 and Bio-Rads Experion Automated Electrophoresis System.11 1.2 Microfluidics and Electroosmosis Microfluidics refers to principles and me thods for controlling and manipulating a small volume of liquids through manifolds of channe ls with dimensions less than a millimeter.2, 12, 13 As microfluidics presents itself as a promisi ng technology in the development of MEMS, it has emerged into a fast-growing field that has rece ived intensive attentions from engineers and scientists. Microf luidics has several unique aspects that distinguish it from traditional fluid mechanics, as follows. In microfluidic flow, the hydraulic diameter of flow ranges from 0.1 micron to 100 micron. As a direct result, the Reynolds number is sma ll, indicating the viscous force is dominant, and laminar flow occurs as it is way smaller than critical Reynolds number for turbulence flow. The continuum assumption still holds as indicated by the low Knudsen number in microfluidic flow. The K nudsen number is defined as KnL where is the mean free path of the fluid molecules and L is the characteristic channel dimension. In liquid, the mean free path is approximated by the lattice space of the molecules.14 The resulting Knudsen number for microfluidic flow is sma ll, well within the range of continuum flow assumption. For example, the lattice spacing for water is on the order of 0.1 nm, and the corresponding Knudsen number for a mi crofluidic flow ranges from 10-3 to 10-6. Electrokinetic effects at th e interface between liquids and solids become significant because of the large surface-to-volume ratio in microfluidic flows. Electric double layer (EDL) is induced in a very thin layer of fluid adjacent to solid surface, and the ions in EDL can move at the presence of an external electri c field. As a result, an electroosmotic flow (EOF) forms in the fluid, and this phenome non was first described by F. F. Reuss in his PAGE 19 19 publication in the Proceedings of the Imperi al Society and Natura lists of Moscow in 1809.14 In the later part of this chapter, I wi ll discuss in details the EDL and the EOF in microfluidic systems. Because of its small volume, the internal heating from viscous dissipation becomes significant in the microfluidic flow when a la rge pressure drop applied. As a result, the fluid density and other properties may vary w ith the temperature, leading the flow to unexpected effects. In microfluidic flows surface tension at the interface of liquid-solid and liquid-gas becomes one of the dominant forces. Due to the large surface-to-volume ratio, it may exceed body forces such as gravity and elec trostatic fields in some applications. Among all the effects mentioned above, the el ectrokinetic effects and the resulting EOF have received the most attention from researcher s in the development of lab-on-a-chip devices. Since the interaction of liquids and solids at th e interface forms the basis of the electroosmosis phenomenon, I first discuss electric double laye r theory based on Gouy-Chapman-Stern model.14 1.2.1 Electric Double Layer When an aqueous fluid is brought in contact with channel wall surface, the wall acquires surface charges due to ion adsorption, or ion disso lution, or a combination of the two ionization mechanisms.14 In case that a LOC device is made on surface of glass or si lica, the deprotonation (ion dissolution) of surface silanol groups (SiOH) determine the charge on the surface. The pHdependent equilibrium for the ionization process is represented as -+SiOHSiO+H Consequently, an electric double layer is form ed close to the channel walls, consisting of two layers (Figure 1-1). Next to the wall is Stern layer, in which ions of opposite charge to that of the solid surface (called counterions, in the diagram) are tightly attracted to the channel surface. Beyond the Stern layer is diffuse layer, in which ions of like charge (called coions, in the diagram) are repelled from the wall. Stern plane is defined as the separating plane between the Stern layer and the diffuse layer. In the diffu se layer, the ions are di stributed in a diffusive PAGE 20 20 manner, as the electro-migration of the ions (toward/away from th e wall) is dynamically balanced by the thermal motions in the diffuse laye r. The concentration of ions in the diffuse layer follows the Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution 0exp s urfzF cc RT (1-1) where s urf is the electric potential in th e EDL induced by the surface charge, 0c is the concentration far from the surface where s urf approaches zero, F is the Faraday constant, R is the gas constant, T is the temperature of the fluid, and zis the valence number of the ions15. For a solution with a symmetric electrolyte, the charge density becomes 02sinh s urf ezF Fzc RT .(1-2) Coupling Equation 1-2 with the Poissons equation 2 e surf (1-3) where is the permittivity of fluid, it yields 2 02 sinhsurf surfzF Fzc RT (1-4) The above equation can be simplifie d from Debye-Hckel approximation,16 which considers that the potential energy of the ions is small in comparison to their thermal energy in the EDL. As a result, the hyper bolic sine term is approximated by the first perturbation only, 2 02 s urf surfzF Fzc R T (1-5) Hence, the resulting expressions for el ectric potential and charge density are expw surfpot d y y (1-6) and PAGE 21 21 2exppot w e dd y y (1-7) where y is the coordinate normal to the wall, w y is the coordinate of the Stern plane, pot is the electric potential at the Stern plane, and 22 02d R T Fzc referred as Debye length, typically is a very small constant. According to Probstein its about 1nm for a concentration of 102 mol/m3 and 10 nm for a concentration of 1 mol/m3 solution.14 From Figure 1-1, its evidential that the el ectric potential drop s exponentially to zero towards the center of the fluid. At the edge of the diffuse layer, which is approximately several Debye lengths from the wall, the potential is clos e to zero. For instance, at the distance of 5d the electric potential is already le ss than 1% of the zeta potential, The charge density also drops exponentially from the surfac e. Hence the bulk fluid, out of EDL, is assumed neutrally charged. 1.2.2 Electroosmosis If an electric field is applie d in the tangential di rection along the solid surface, the ions in the diffuse layer will move under Lorentz body fo rce and carry surrounding solvent with them, thus causing the entire fluid into motion. Such movement of liquid by an applied electric field relative to stationary charged surface is called electroosmosis. To understand the electroosmotic flow propert ies (velocity magnitude and profile), a simple EOF confined in a channel between two infi nite glass plates is considered. An electric field is imposed via electr odes at the ends of the channel. Th e electric double layer formed at the surface of the glass plates is assumed thin, su ch that the Debye length is much smaller in comparison to the channel width (the gap of the two plates). PAGE 22 22 As shown in Figure 1-2, a local Cartesian coordinate system is set up with the origin on the surface (stern plane actually, in order to simplify the exponential index in electric potential in Equation 1-6), the first axis x tangential to the wall surface, and the second axis y normal to the wall surface. The set of governing equations for a stea dy, low Reynolds number EOF is given by 1 0D Dt (1-8) 20ep V (1-9) and 2 e (1-10) where is fluid density, is kinematic viscosity, and is electric potential of the fluid. The overall electric potential inside the channel is a superposition of s urf the electric potential associated with the surface charge, and ext that caused by the external electric field s urfext (1-11) Since the external electric field will caus e no local accumulation of electric charge, the Laplacian of ext drops to zero, 20extii iF zc (1-12) s urf is assumed invariant along the glass plates it is independent of x coordinate, hence 0surf x Thus, the Laplacian of s urf reduces to 2 22 2 222 s urf surfsurf x yy (1-13) Plug Equation 1-11 into Equation 1-10, and make use of Equations 1-12 and1-13. The Poissons equation is reduced to PAGE 23 23 2 2 s urf e y (1-14) Substitute the charge density term in Equation 1-9 with Equation 1-14. The momentum equation in x direction yields 2 2 221 s urf xudp E y dxy (1-15) where xextEx is a constant in a uniform electric field along the channel surface. To solve Equation 1-15, the followi ng boundary conditions are applied: The electric potential is known at the Stern plane 0, s urfpot yh (1-16) The geometric symmetry of flow field implies that the velocity gradient is zero at the centerline of the channel, i.e., 20yhu y (1-17) The flow is non-slipping at the stern layer, namely, 0,0yhu (1-18) Integrate twice on the both sides of Equatio n 1-15, and make use of Equations 1-16 to 118. The velocity is solved as 221 ()() 22 4xsurfdp hh uyyE dx (1-19) Recall the expression of s urf in Equation 1-6, the result above can be rewritten as 221 ()(1) 22 4dpot y xdp hh uyyEe dx (1-20) The resulting flow, as expressed in Equation 120, is the combination of a pressure driven flow and an EOF. The first term in Equation 1-20 represents the flow in the channel due to the presence of pressure drop, while the second term stands for the electroosmosis. By introducing an electroosmotic mobility term PAGE 24 24 pot (1-21) the expression for the electroosmosis component can be simplified as ()(1)dy eoxuyEe. (1-22) The velocity profile of an EOF ( 0 dpdx in Equation 1-20) in the channel with an constant cross sectional area is thus a plug shape, as plotted in Figure 1-2. The EOF velocity near the channel wall is amplified and plotted in Figure 13. At the surface, the velocity is zero because of the non-slipping boundary condition. Towa rds the centerline of th e channel, the flow velocity approximates asymptotically to a constant value ( E ), which is determined by the electric field, the fluid viscosity, the fluid dielectric permittivity, and the channel surface zeta potential. The velocity increases dramatically in the vicinity of the chan nel surface such that in the distance of several Debye length (~5d ), the velocity already reaches within 99% of the asymptotic value. Consider a t ypical case that the channel width h is 3 orders of magnitude larger than the EDL thickness, the flow is appr oximately regarded as a plug flow moving at a constant velocity, uE The EOF in a channel of varyi ng cross sectional area, however, does not resemble a plug flow any more. The velocity profile, as will be discussed in Chapter 4, depends on the variation as well as the channel width. 1.3 Microfluidic Mixing In general, a lab-on-a-chip device integrates multiple components capable of various analytical functions: mixing, extr action, separation and detection. A mixer, as demonstrated in the example below, is one of the most crucial co mponents. Because of the difficulty in achieving convective mixing in laminar flows at low Reyn olds numbers, LOC devices for application of chemical reactions or biological assays often re quire a mixer to rapidly homogenize solutions of PAGE 25 25 reagents. This need has long been recognized, a nd a considerable account of literatures has been devoted on micro mixer design for LOC devices.17-35 Consider an example of a LOC device for protei n expression. The devi ce consists of an in vitro transcription and transla tion (IVT) system in which prot eins are synthesized through two steps: a DNA template is transcribed into messenger RNA through RNA polymerase process with an appropriate promoter; the resulting RNA is thereafter translated into proteins with ribosomes and additional necessary components. To detect the protein expression yield, the product of the IVT has to be mixed with reagen ts and their reaction product is subsequently measured. For example, luciferase is a protein that can be produced by the IVT. The production of luciferase may be detected through its luminesc ent reaction with luciferin, adenosine triphosphate (ATP), mo lecular oxygen and Mg2+.36 IVT system product (with luciferase) is brought in contact with the reagent solu tion (with luciferin, ATP, Oxygen and Mg2+) at the joint of a T-channel as shown in Figure 1-4. The reaction takes place at the interface of the two streams as they are driven toward the other end of T-channel. Th e product of reaction, bioluminescence emission, can be detected by an external detection system (a CCD camera or a photomultiplier tube). Thus, a thorough and rapid mixing is required to ensure all luciferase involved in the reaction simultaneously. Mixing, however, is hard to achieve in a LO C device, especially for solutions of large molecules with low molecular diffusivity. As pointed out previously, a fluid flow in microchannels of LOC is often laminar, leav ing the possibility for mixing to the molecular diffusion only. It takes considerable amount of time to achieve an effective mixing by the molecular diffusion. Take the luciferase detectio n as an example. Assume the segregated flows of luciferase and luciferin solution are pumped w ith a mean velocity U ~ 1 cm/s. The T-channel PAGE 26 26 has a typical width of h ~ 100 m; the typical kinematic viscosity of fluid is ~ 10-5 cm2/s. The resulting Reynolds number is thus Uh/ ~ 1 and the flow dominate d by viscous force. The molecular diffusivity of proteins is very low with the typical value of 10-7 cm2/s. The corresponding Peclet number of the flow ( Pe=Uh/D ), which is the ratio of molecular convection time to molecular diffusion time, tu rns out to be on the order of 105, implying that the convection of the proteins is much faster than the mol ecular diffusion. The t ypical time for molecules diffusing half of the width of the channel, h2/D can be as long as 1000 seconds. A microfluidic mixer is thus in demand to enhance fluid mixing in LOC devices. A principle of mixing two segregated streams is to increase interf acial area and at the same time reduce diffusion distance. The key to achieve e ffective mixing in a laminar flow is thus to induce transverse motion, namely by stretching a nd folding fluid flow at cross section of the channel. The past decade has seen a booming number of reports in scientific literatures describing new approaches following this strategy. In general, these approaches can be categorized into two strategies. One is passiv e mixing technique, in which the transverse motion is induced as a sole result of channel geometry. The other is active mixi ng technique, in which the transverse motions result from interaction of an additional force with driving force (pressure force for Poiseuille flow or electrokinetic force for electroosmotic flow). In general, passive mixers are always prefer able, as they require no additional forces. Sophisticated design and complicated fabricatio n, however, are always demanded to achieve effective and efficient mixing in the passive mixe rs. Various mixing designs have been reported by many research groups. Rohr fabricated a monolithic mixer by polymerizing porous monolithic polymers in the microchannels, and used it to mix aqueous solutions of two fluorescent dyes.25 Burghelea added a small amount of flexible polymers to working liquids, PAGE 27 27 thus to induce chaos and achieved efficient mixing in microchannels.26 Flow split-andrecombine was applied in Shonfelds design of micro mixer to shuffle fluid flows, and resulted in a high mixing efficiency.28 Chung et al. presented a simple yet effective mixing chamber to allow fluids self-circulate for mixing enhancement29 Spiral 2D and 3D microchannels were fabricated to utilized the transverse dean fl ows resulting from centrif ugal effects to enhance mixing.27, 33 Thorough mixing may also be obtain ed by creating non-uniformity on channel surface.34, 35 One noticeable design, reported by Whitesi des group, is to create an additional herringbone structures at the bottom of channel to achieve chaotic mixing.19 In general, for passive micro mixers, extra features have to be added to regular channe l geometries, therefore the design is complex and the fabrication processe s are stringent. Passive mixers, as an extra component to microfluidic systems, results in flow rate reduction in original flow. For example, the addition of herringbone stru ctures at channel floors cause s more pressure drop over the microchannel as fluids are pumped through, hence more pressure head is required to maintain same flow rate when a passive mixer is installed. Active mixers use various forces, such as mech anical force, Lorentz force, magnetic force, centrifugal force, and acoustic force, to interact with driving force of a fluid flow, and therefore induce transverse flows at cross sections of microchannels. As a result, additional energy is consumed in active mixer other than driving flui d in microfluidic system. Magnetic force was exploited by Suzuki et al. to facilitate mixing.32 They embedded magnetic beads in microchannels and applied appropria te temporal variations of magne tic field to stir the fluids. Bau et al. developed a magneto-hydrodynamic sti rrer in which a flow was stirred by Lorentz force induced by the coupling of alternating electric field and a static magnetic field.31 Electrohydrodynamic force as a result of an electric field, was used by Moctar et al. to produce PAGE 28 28 transversal secondary flow and thus enhance mixing.30 Ultrasonic waves from piezoelectric transducers were used by Yaralioglu et al. to ge nerate acoustic stirring of the fluid perpendicular to the flow direction in a microchannel.23 A simple active mixing approach by alternatively electroosmotically pumping fluids ha s been reported by various groups.18, 29 Grumann et al. proposed a novel fluidic concept to drastically accelerate mixing process in batch-mode using centrifugal forces.21 In general, active mixers usually yi eld a better mixing result, in comparison to the passive microfluidic mixers. However, the design, fabrication and the control of the additional forces are always more challenging. 1.4 Objectives and Study Overview The major objective of this re search is to study and develop a novel microfluidic mixer based on the phenomenon that fluid flow circulates in a three dimensional (3D) channel driven by pressure force and electrokinetic force. To ev aluate the efficiency of microfluidic mixers, I also develop deconvolution microscopy for visualiz ing flows in microchann els and an analytical method to study flow recirculation in wavy channels. The remaini ng part of this proposal is organized as follows. In Chapter 2, the design and fabrication pr ocess of LOC devices are presented. The construction of a 3D ridge structur e in microchannels is explained. A microfluidic testing device is fabricated on a plastic plate using hot em bossing method. A two dimensional (2D) wavy channel is fabricated on poly-dimethylsiloxane (PDMS) substrate for studying the mechanism and property of flow recircula tion. Finally, a micro mixer utilizing the recirculation is manufactured on plastic substrate. The char acterization of hot embossing process is also reported. Chapter 3 describes deconvolution microscopy, an equivalent yet less expensive alternative to confocal microscopy, in evaluation of fluid mixi ng. The theory is discu ssed. An investigation PAGE 29 29 of mixing in a Poiseuille flow in ridged channels is carried ou t to illustrate the use of the deconvolution microscopy. An analytical solution to EOF with finite pr essure in 2D wavy cha nnels is developed in Chapter 4. The method is used in exploring recirculat ion in a wavy channel, which is expected to help understanding recirculation in a 3D ridge d channel. The effects of channel geometry on the electric field, streamline pattern, and flow rate are studied. The similarity between the electric field and the EOF velocity is also discus sed. With a parametric study of recirculation in wavy channel, the onset conditions and the charac teristic of flow recirculation in the wavy channels are investigated. Chapter 5 includes results of a numerical study of recirculation in ridged channel using CFD simulation. A micro mixer, called pulsed recirculation mixer, is designed based on the study of flow recirculation in the ridged channel. Periodic recirc ulation is induced in the mixer to enhance fluid mixing. Experiments are carried out in a prototype mixer fabricated following the procedure in Chapter 2. The experiment re sults agree well with theoretical predictions by CFD simulations. The conclusions are drawn and the future directions are discussed in Chapter 6. PAGE 30 30 Figure 1-1. Electric double layer (EDL) and elec tric potential profile in EDL. The electric double layer locates next to the wall surface, and consists of Stern layer and diffuse layer. PAGE 31 31 Figure 1-2. Electroosmotic flow be tween two parallel infinite gla ss plates with thin EDL. The velocity profile in bulk flow is uniform, while in the diffuse layer it is an exponential curve. 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 dy eou E0.99 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 dy eou E0.99 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 dy eou E0.99 Figure 1-3. Velocity profile of an electroosmotic flow in the region close to the glass surface. PAGE 32 32 Figure 1-4. Schematic of bioluminescence detect ion in a T-microchannel. Luciferase solution from IVT is pumped into T-channel from inlet A, while reaction solution, including luciferin, ATP, Oxygen, and Mg2+, is pumped from inlet B. Bioluminescent reaction takes place at the interface of the two steams as they flows toward outlet C. PAGE 33 33 CHAPTER 2 DEVICE DESIGN AND FABRICATION* This chapter describes the design and fabricat ion process of three LOC devices that are used in the dissertation work. The first device is made from plastics and consists of a ridged channel, which is used in studying fluid mixi ng in ridged channel and validating deconvolution microscopy for microfluidic visualization. Th e device is also used in studying the flow recirculation, a phenomenon observed in ridged ch annels when a pressure drop and an electric field are imposed. The second device is made from PDMS and consists of a wavy channel, which is essentially a simplified form (2D versi on) of the ridged channel. The third device, a micro mixer is developed utilizi ng the flow recirculat ion phenomenon. The mixer incorporates a portion of ridged channel and a pair of screen-printed electrodes. The characterization of the fabrication process is reported at the end of this chapter. Equation Chapter (Next) Section 1 2.1 Ridged Channel The ridge structures in the ridged cha nnel are designed to mimic the herringbone structures19 or slanted wells37 described in the literature. Th e formation of herringbone structures requires an anisotropic etching in a silicon wafer a nd then transferred into a PDMS device, but is difficult to achieve in a glass plate on which the an isotropic etching is difficult. In addition, the creation of two channel depths (one for the chan nel and one for herringbone structures) requires a multiple photolithographic process with two phot omasks and a stringent optical alignment. Slanted wells are produced by usi ng an additional steplaser abla tionafter microfabrication of microchannels in a plastic device.20 Part of this chapter has been published in Deconvolution Microscopy fo r Flow Visualization in Microchannels, Analytical Chemestry 2007, 79(6): p. 2576-2582; and in Effects of Fabrication Process Parameters on the Propertie s of Cyclic Olefin Copolymer Microfluidic Devices, Journal of MicroElectroMechanical Systems 2006, 15(5): p. 1060. PAGE 34 34 Ridged channels are fabricated on plastic subs trates, from a metal mold, which is created from a glass plate. In comparison to the count erparts, the ridges, as a result of one-step operation, takes less effort in th e fabrication. This section de scribes the ridge formation from isotropic etching, the design of the ridged ch annels, and the fabrica tion processes including photolithography, electroplating, hot embossing, and bonding. The plastic device with ridged channels is used in study of flow twisting and deconvolution mi croscopy reported in Chapter 3, as well as the study of flow recirc ulation presented in Chapter 5. 2.1.1 Design It is well known that chemical wet etching in a glass plate results in an isotropic removal. As illustrated in Figure 2-1a, isotropic etch ing goes laterally under the mask (called undercutting) while it engraves downwards, as in dicated by the arrows. Therefore, the cross section of the channel is in the shape of D, after the mask is removed and the bottom plate is sealed with another plate. A scanning electron micrograph (SEM) of such a channel is shown in Figure 2-1c. However, a ridge structure can be created when two features are designed close enough with an appropriate etching depth, as sh own in Figure 2-1b. The ridges can be obtained by using a judicious design such as different shapes and angles as illustrated in Figure 2-1d. A T-channel is thus designed to illustrate th e feasibility and to st udy flow properties in such ridged channels. The photomask of the Tchannel is drawn in AutoCAD (Autodesk, San Rafael, CA). As schematically shown in Figure 2-2, the layout is composed of a series of identical parallelograms that repeats at a distance of 108 lm between M and N. Lines from well 1 to M, well 2 to M, and well 3 to N are continuous lines of 30 m in width. Drawing is then sent to Photo Sciences, a photomask manufacturer in Torrance, CA. to generate a 4-inch square da rk-field chromium photomask. PAGE 35 35 2.1.2 Photolithography The pattern on the photomask is then reproduc ed in a glass plate via photolithography using microfabrication equipments at the Univers ity of Florida Nano-Fabrication facility. A 4inch square, 0.2-inch thick soda-lime glass pl ate, pre-coated with a chromium layer (0.12m ) and a photoresist layer (0.2m Shipley 1800), is purchased from Te lic Company (Valencia, CA), and used in wet-etching for a glass master. The fabrication procedure is described as follows and illustrated in Figure 2-3. 1. The glass plate aligned with th e photomask (Figure 2-3a,b), is exposed to UV light (365 nm) for 30 seconds at an approximate intensity of 10 mW/cm2, using a Karl-Suss MA6 mask aligner (SUSS MicroTec, Germany). 2. The glass plate is then rinsed in photoresis t developer (AZ 312MIF, Clariant Corporation, Somerville, NJ) for 40 seconds to removed the exposed photoresist. 3. The glass plate is transferred to a contai ner with chromium etchant (1020, Transene, Danvers, MA) for 30 seconds to etch away the unprotected chromium. 4. A glass etching is subsequently carried out by immersing the glass plate in a glass etchant solution (HF/HNO3/H2O mixture with volume ratio of 20:14: 66) for 12 minutes. As a result of isotropic etching describe d above, ridged chan nels are created on the glass substrate (Figure 2-3c). 5. The remaining photoresist and chromium on th e glass plate are removed in acetone and chromium etchant (Figure 2-3d). 2.1.3 Electroplating The glass plate, with ridged channels created on the surface, serves as the master piece in electroplating. It is cleaned and then shipped to Optical Electro Forming (Clearwater, FL) to generate a nickel electroforming mold. The glass plate is first coated wi th a conductive seeding layer, and then connected to th e positive pole of a power supply while the negative pole is attached to a nickel source. Both are placed in a solution of nickel salt. As the electrical current flows through the circuit, nickel ions in the solution lose their charge and settle on the glass plate, while at the other pole the nickel source slowly dissolves and replenishes the ions in the PAGE 36 36 solution. This process is calle d electroplating, and the net result of electroplating is that the nickel is continuously transferre d from the source and adheren tly deposited onto the glass plate surface. Note that the electroplat ing is a slow process in general. It takes a day to deposit a 2mm thick nickel plate (E-form) that sturdy enough for molding. After being taken off the glass master, th e E-form possesses a negative image of the desired pattern (Figure 2-3e). However, there is a notable discrepancy between the resulting Efrom and the glass plate. The cause and the ch aracterization of the difference are discussed in the last part of this chapter. 2.1.4 Hot Embossing As shown in Figure 2-3f, E-form is employed to produce plastic parts from cyclic olefin copolymer (COC) resins (Ticona Topas 8007, Fl orence, KY) using a hydraulic press (Carver, Wabash, IN). Each plastic part is trimmed into a 1 x 3 substrate using a CNC milling machine (Flashcut CNC, San Carlos, CA), which is also used to drilled holes (2 mm diameter) at the ends of channels. The resulting pl astic part is schematically dr awn in Figures 2-3g, and 2-3h. 2.1.5 Bonding The channels in the plastic substrate are se aled with 0.1-mm thick film (Topas 8007) using a thermal laminator (Caten a 35, GBC, Northbrook, IL), while the holes become wells as a result. Figure 2-4 shows a picture of the finished plastic device. The thickness of the device is 1.5 mm. Channels are 40 m deep and 110 m wide, except where specified otherwise. The height of ridge is 12 m. The dimensions of channels are measured using a Dektak II surface profiler (Veeco USA, Woodbury, NY) before lamination. 2.2 Wavy Channel In the study of the flow in ridged channe ls, a major objective is to understand the mechanism and the properties of flow recirculation. However, the complexity of the ridged PAGE 37 37 channel, a 3D geometry resulting from isotr opic etching as discusse d previously, makes it difficult to characterize the location, size, a nd intensity of recirc ulation. Although the deconvolution microscopy can be used to visualize flow in such ridged channel as demonstrated in Chapter 3, it is limited to measure the scalar properties in the flow, such as the fluorescence intensity. Particle image velocimery (PIV)38, 39 is thus used for characte rizing flow recirculation. The ridged channel must be simplified to a 2D channel in order to use PIV because of its limited capability in measuring the velocity com ponent along the camera axis. As a result, the width of a ridged channel is made much larger than the depth, as shown in Figure 2-5a, so that the geometric effect from side walls then becomes negligible at the center. This channel is then rotated by 90; the channel width thus b ecomes along the optical axis direction. The resulting 2D ridged channel is illustrated in Figure 2-5b (stereo view and top view). The ridges on the bottom of the ridged channel are transferred to the side wall of the 2D ridged channel. A wavy channel is similar to the 2D ridged ch annel, and shown in Figure 2-7, except the ridge features on the side wall are replaced by sinusoidal waves. The 2D ridged channel and the wavy channels are fabricated on a PDMS substrate by soft lithography.40, 41 Experiments in the wavy channel are carried out and resu lts are presented in Chapter 4. 2.2.1 Design The photomask layout for the wavy channels is drawn using AutoCAD, and the schematic is shown in Figure 2-6. 40 m wide continuous lines connect wells 1, 2, and 3 to M, wells 4 and 5 to N. Between M and N are the patterns for a 2D ridged channel (Figure 2-6a), a wavy channel (Figure 2-6b), and three other t ypes of channels. Drawing of the photomask is sent to Photo Sciences to generate a 4-inch squa re dark-field chromium photomask. PAGE 38 38 2.2.2 Soft Lithography The pattern on the photomask is constructe d on the surface of a silicon wafer using conventional photolithography techniques. By cas ting PDMS onto the silicon wafer the pattern is inversely reproduced on the PDMS. Closed channels are obtained by sealing the PDMS piece with another blank PDMS piece. This fabr ication process is called soft lithography.40 The detailed processing step s are provided below. 1. A silicon wafer is cleaned by rinsing in tric hloroethylene (TCE), acetone, and deionized water in sequence. 2. After dehydrated in a vacuum oven at 200C for 5 minutes, the wafer is primed with hexamethyldisilizane (HMDS) to promote adhesion between photoresist and the silicon substrate in the next step. 3. Negative photoresist NR7-1500P (Fut urrex, Franklin, NJ) is spin-coated on the silicon wafer using a spinner (Headway Research, Garla nd, Texas) at 3000 rpm for 40 seconds. 4. The wafer is heated on a 150C hotplate for 60 seconds for soft bake. 5. The wafer is then exposed on the Karl-Suss MA6 mask aligner using UV light (365 nm) for 60 seconds at an approxim ate intensity of 10 mW/cm2. 6. The exposed wafer is then heated on a 100C hotplate for 60 seconds for post-exposure bake. 7. Unexposed photoresist on the silicon wafer is then rinsed off by immersing in resist developer RD6 (Futurrex, Franklin, NJ) for 25 seconds. 8. The wafer is then dry etched in a deep reactive-ion etching (DRIE) system (Surface Technology Systems, UK) for an etching depth of 100 m; the remaining photoresist is stripped off through a post O2 ashing process in the same equipment. 9. The wafer, with the negative image of the desi red pattern, is primed again with HMDS that will facilitate the peeling of PDMS off silicon substrate in next step. 10. Degassed PDMS (Dow Corning, Midland, Mich igan) is poured on the top of the wafer. 11. PDMS piece is peeled off the wafer after fully curing (~24 hours at room temperature), and cut into a desired shape using a razor blade; th e PDMS has the desired channel geometries at the surface. PAGE 39 39 2.2.3 Bonding The PDMS piece is sealed by a blank PDMS cover of same size, and then bonded to a glass slide to the side with no features. Th e cover PDMS piece has holes punched at locations corresponding at well 2 and converging point N. The PDMS and the glas s surfaces are treated by plasma using a high frequency generator (Ele ctro-Technic Products, Chicago, IL) to promote bonding. A picture of the finished PDMS device with wavy channels is shown in Figure 2-7. 2.3 Micro Mixer Once the flow recirculation in a ridged channe l is well understood, it is incorporated in a micro mixer design to facilitate mixing by flow r ecirculation. Details of the discussion on the microfluidic mixer are provided in Chapter 5. 2.3.1 Device Design The overall design of the micro mixer (Figure 2-8) is similar to the device consisting of the wavy channels, except for the patterns of the ch annel between M and N. The small portion of channel circled by dashed lines in the figure is th e ridged channel similar to the ones discussed in section 2.1. The pattern, incl uding 20 parallelograms, account s for ridged channels of 2.1millimeter in length, while the total length of the channel connecting M and N is 20 mm. Two electrodes, printed on the cover film, are to be placed outside the ri dged channel portion as schematically shown in Figure 2-8. 2.3.2 Fabrication of Plastic Substrates The fabrication processes (photolithography, hot embossing, trimming and drilling) of the micro mixer are exactly same as the process describe d in section 2.1. Briefly, the micro mixer is first built in a glass plate, which serves as a mast er to generate a nickel mold by electroplating. Plastic resins are then pressed against the mold to replicate plastic chip s. They are cut into desired shapes on a CNC milling machine; and hole s are drilled at the ends of the channels. PAGE 40 40 2.3.3 Electrode Printing Electrodes are printed on a plastic thin film using screen printing technique.42 Figure 2-9a shows the drawing for the elec trodes compiled in AutoCAD. The dashed lines indicate the outlines of the channels on the plastic part. Th e electrodes wires are lines of 0.3 mm wide, while the electrode pads (A and B) are circle of 1 mm in diameter. The distance between two electrodes is 3 mm. The pattern is cut in a 0.3 mm thick stainle ss steel sheet by laser (Global Stencil, Austin, TX), forming a stencil. Conductive ink is obtained by dissolving carbonate paste (BQ225, DuPont, NC) in acetone at a conc entration of 0.24 g/ml. An air brush (Badger, Franklin Park, IL) is used to spray the ink onto the plastic film with the electrode stencil firmly pressed against it. After a 2 hour curing in a 70 C oven, the film with the screen printed electrode s is ready for thermal lamination. A picture of the screen-pri nted electrodes is shown in Figure 2-9b. The thickness of electrodes is about 5 microns. After lamination, two 2-cm long metal wires ar e glued onto the electr ode pads (A and B) using conductive epoxy (ITW Chemtronics, Kennesaw, GA). A picture of the finished micro mixer is shown in Figure 2-10. 2.4 Characterization of Fabrication Process A glass master and an E-form are used in fa bricating LOC plastic de vices. Ideally, through the E-form (Figure 2-11b), micro features in the plastic chip (F igure 2-11c), should be identical to those in the glass master (Figure 2-11a). However, discrepancies exist between the glass master and the plastic replica. To characteri ze the difference, a Dektak profiler is used to measure the channel depths at 64 different locations in the glass master, the ridge heights at the corresponding locations on the E-form, and the ch annel depths at the corresponding locations in the plastic chip. PAGE 41 41 2.4.1 Comparison between Glass Master and E-Form Comparing the measurements between the gla ss master and the E-form, it is found the ridge heights on the E-form are statistically greate r than the channel depths on the glass master. The increase is averaged 0.31 m with a variance of 0.09 m. Figure 2-12 shows the histogram of the difference between the two sets of measurements. The expansion of E-form may result from th e addition of a seedi ng layer between the Eform and the glass master during the electropl ating process. Because glass is non-conductive material, a thin layer of silver nitride is deposit ed on the glass master surface to allow the growth of nickel. According to the manufacturer, a s ilver nitride solution is sprayed over the glass surface before its placed into th e electroplating bath. As the el ectroplating process is over, the whole piece is immersed in a solven t, where the seeding layer is dissolved and the nickel plate is separated from the glass master. The seeding la yer, however, is not a conformal coating on the glass surface. Instead, less silver nitride is spra yed into the channel cavity, so that the seeding layer deposited on the channel surfa ce is thinner than the rest of the glass plate surface. The nonuniformity leads to the difference between the ridge heights on the E-form and the channel depths on the glass master, and ev entually contributes to the di screpancy between the resulting plastic chip and the glass master. 2.4.2 Comparison between E-Form and Plastic Chip In comparison to the height of ridges on the Eform, the depth of the channel on the plastic chip is statistically shallower (Figure 2-13). The difference is averaged -0.31 m with a variance of 0.12 m. A possible cause for the shrinkage of the plastic chip is the mold shrinkage of the plastic material as it cools after the hot em bossing. According to Topas Advanced Polyers,43 Topas 8007 has a typical mold shrink age value in the range of 0.6% to 0.7%. Since the feature PAGE 42 42 size is about 40 m (the ridge height on the E-form), the mold shrinkage reasonably explains the difference of 0.31 m between the E-form and the plastic substrate. 2.4.3 Comparison of Plastic Chip and Glass Master The difference between the channels on the plas tic chip and those on the glass master is a combined result of E-form expansion and pl astic chip shrinkage. Figure 2-14 shows the histogram of the difference between the two sets of measurements. The average of the difference is 0 m, indicating that the plastic replica is statistic ally same as its master. The variance of the difference is 0.14 m, which is larger than either variance values in previous comparisons. This is because the electroplating and the hot embossi ng process both contribute to the discrepancy between the master and the replica. Due to the inevitable errors in the electroplat ing and the hot embossing process, the plastic chip generally has slightly different dimensions from its glass master. Sometimes the difference can be negligible, which is the case above wher e the E-form expansion balances the plastic shrinkage. However in most cases, it turns ou t the opposite. Hence a prudential control the etching depth in the fabrication of glass master is preferred, so that the final plastic product results with a desired depth. At the same time, optimization the fabrication process is needed to minimize the variation in the difference between the plastic chip and the glass master. This, however, is beyond the scope of the thesis work. PAGE 43 43 mask substrate (a) (b) (c) (d) Figure 2-1. Creation of ridged channels through isotropic etchi ng. Isotropic etching with a single continuous opening leads to a D-shaped channel (a), and the SEM picture is shown in (c). Ridges are obtained from judi cious designs and isotro pic etching (b), as illustrated by SEM picture of a ridged channel (d) in a microfluidic device made from cyclic olefin copolymers. The scaling ba rs in (c) and (d) are 100 m and 200 m, respectively Figure 2-2. Photomask layout of a T-channel. Three wells in the layout are numbered for references in the text. The lengths of the lines connecting wells 1 and 2 to the intersection M are 4.6 and 10. 2 mm respectively, while th e line connecting well 3 to N is 4.6 mm long. The ridged channel porti on (from M to N) is 40 mm in length. In the inset, the angel of parallelogram is 45, 30 wm 30 hm and 108 lm PAGE 44 44 Figure 2-3. Fabrication process of plastic LOC devices. (a) p hotomask; (b) pre-coated glass plate, aligned with photomask, is exposed to UV light; (c) photoresist, chromium, and glass substrate are etched sequentially; (d ) the remaining photore sist and chromium are stripped off the glass plat e; (e) a nickel E-form is ge nerated from the glass plate; (f) plastic resins are pressed against the Eform; (g-h) plastic chip is taken off the Eform, and trimmed into desired shape. Figure 2-4. Plastic device with 6 channels. Th e highlighted one is the ridged channel designed for test. PAGE 45 45 Figure 2-5. The 3D ridged cha nnels and 2D simplified form of ridged channels. (a) Extending the width of ridged channel can minimize the variation of flow in lateral direction, thus reducing the number of dimensions by one (b) An alternative simplification of the ridged channel is between a flat wall a nd a wall with profile that mimics ridged channel bottom. PAGE 46 46 Figure 2-6. Photomask layout of wavy channels Five wells in the layout are numbered for references in the text. The lengths of the lines connec ting wells 1, 2 and 3 to the intersection M, and lines conn ecting well 4 and 5 to N are all 6 mm. Inset (a) shows the detailed photomask design of a 2D arc channel, whose profile mimics the bottom of ridged channels. 21.2 sm 40 rm and 76.4 lm Inset (b) shows the detailed photomask design of a wavy cha nnel, whose bottom profile is a sinusoidal curve. 34.5 hm 5.5 am and 76.4 lm Figure 2-7. Wavy channels fabri cated on PDMS substrates. The microscopic image is shown in inset. PAGE 47 47 Figure 2-8. Photomask layout of a pulsed reci rculation mixer. The lengths of the lines connecting wells 1, 2 and 3 to the intersec tion M, and lines connecting well 4 and 5 to N are all 6 mm. Two electrodes, spaced 0.3 mm, are schematically shown in the design. Between the electrodes is the ridged channel portion. Inset shows the detailed photomask design of ridged channe l. The angel of parallelogram is 45, 30 wm 30 hm and 108 lm Figure 2-9. Layout and microsc opic image of electrodes. The electrodes are printed on plastic film. PAGE 48 48 Figure 2-10. Plastic device with a pulsed recirc ulation mixer. Solutions are pumped into the mixer via inlets E and F, which are glued to wells 1 and 2. Wires C and D are glued to electrode pads A and B. An electric fi eld is applied to the mixer by connecting C and D to an external power supply. Figure 2-11. Glass master, the E-form and a plastic chip used in the work. PAGE 49 49 0 5 10 15 20 25 30-0 .8 -0 .6 0 .4 -0.2 0 0. 2 0.4 0 6 0 8 1 1. 2 1.4 1 6 1 8(E-form height) (glass master depth)# of measurement s m 0 5 10 15 20 25 30-0 .8 -0 .6 0 .4 -0.2 0 0. 2 0.4 0 6 0 8 1 1. 2 1.4 1 6 1 8(E-form height) (glass master depth)# of measurement s m Figure 2-12. Histogram of the differences be tween the ridge heights on the E-form and the channel depths on the glass master. The pr ofile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. 0 2 4 6 8 10-1 .5 1.3 -1 .1 0.9 -0 .7 -0 .5 -0 .3 -0 .1 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7(plastic chip depth) (E-form height)# of measurement s m 0 2 4 6 8 10-1 .5 1.3 -1 .1 0.9 -0 .7 -0 .5 -0 .3 -0 .1 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.7(plastic chip depth) (E-form height)# of measurement s m Figure 2-13. Histogram of the differences between the channel depths in the plastic chip and the ridge heights on the E-form. The profile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. PAGE 50 50 0 2 4 6 8 10 121.2 -1 -0 .8 -0 6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0 .6 0 .8 1 1.2(plastic chip depth) (glass master depth)# of measurement s m 0 2 4 6 8 10 121.2 -1 -0 .8 -0 6 -0.4 -0.2 0 0.2 0.4 0 .6 0 .8 1 1.2(plastic chip depth) (glass master depth)# of measurement s m Figure 2-14. Histogram of the differences between the channel depths on the plastic chip and the channel depths on the glass master. The pr ofile of normal distribution with calculated mean and variance is also plotted. PAGE 51 51 CHAPTER 3 DECONVOLUTION MICROSCOPY FOR FLOW VISUALIZATION* 3.1 Introduction As explained in Chapter 1, microfluidic system s are widely used in chemical analysis and biological applications, and a thor ough mixing of reagents is ofte n required. To evaluate the efficiency of fluid mixing, flow visualization is often used. Dire ct flow visualization is also important for studying microflow properties, in vestigating flow beha vior, and verifying computational fluid dynamics simulations.39 The primary methods used for microscale flow visualization are particle-based flow velocimetry, such as particle image velocimetry (PIV)44 and optical imaging techniques enabled by fluorofores or dyes. PIV measures the velocity in a twodimension plane due to small depth-of-fie ld of a high numerical aperture lens,45, thus it is difficult to be used for visualization of a complex, three-dimensional flow. Optical imaging is a flow visualization met hod to study fluid motions inferred from color or fluorescence intensity.39 It has been used to study mixing in microflows,18, 20, 23, 24, 35, 37, 46-50 diffusion in a curved channel,51, 52 and the shape of injected samples at an intersection.53, 54 The majority of these optical imaging techniques acq uire images from the top of a microchannel, visualizing a two-dimensional flow Interpretation is thus straightforward when the vertical gradient components (from the top to the bottom of the channel) of flow variables are negligible. However, such top-view images can be easily mi sinterpreted if the flow is three-dimensional.55 For instance, two vertical layers of unmixed flow s could be mistaken as a mixed flow because an image acquired from the top may show uniform fluorescent signals across the channel. Examples of a three-dimensional flow include chaotic mixing due to transverse flows19, 20 and Part of this chapter has been published in Deconvolution Microscopy fo r Flow Visualization in Microchannels, Analytical Chemestry 2007, 79 (6): p. 2576-2582. PAGE 52 52 advection in a three-dimensional serpentin e channel with vert ical through-holes.27, 55-58 Characterization of these flows can be studied by confocal fluorescence microscopy.19, 24, 50 However, such a setup is expensive and compli cated, preventing it from becoming a widely used method. Equation Chapter (Next) Section 1 This chapter aims to exploit a technique that combines a conventional optical microscope with a deconvolution method, and apply it in eval uating fluid mixing in microfluidic flows. The technique, called three-dimensional deconvolution microscopy, collects a se ries of images at different focal planes and then uses a computa tional deconvolution process to remove the out-offocus fluorescence signal and correct the images Compared to confocal microscopy that physically removes the out-of-focus light info rmation via a pinhole, deconvolution microscopy employs a mathematical method to correct for optical blurring. Deconvolution microscopy has been used by medical and biologi cal scientists for visualizing the cellular structures of tissue specimens; the details of the approa ch have recently been reviewed.59, 60 Moreover, there is software that is commercially available for the application. Compared to the confocal fluorescence microscopy, one adva ntage of our approach is it s use of a widely-available conventional optical microscope. In addition, it does not have the drawback of the confocal microscopy that only allows limited amount of li ght to pass through the pi nhole due to confocal requirement. The theoretical background before th e description of the experimental results is briefly discussed in the end of this chapter. 3.2 Theoretical Background Deconvolution microscopy is composed of two steps: optical sectioning and image reconstruction. Optical sectioni ng refers to the process of ac quiring volume images by optically sectioning the solution in a channel, plane by pl ane via the displacement of the focal plane along the optical axis, as illustrated in Figure 3-1. The objective lens of the microscope is PAGE 53 53 consecutively adjusted in discrete steps, and a stack of two-dimensional images of different sections are collected. Since th e acquired images are blurred due to contributions outside the focal plane during the image formation, a digita l processcalled deconvol utionis carried out to remove the blurring and to reconstruct a co rrected 3D image. Optical sectioning and the deconvolution algorithms used in this work are br iefly discussed as follows; additional details can be found in the literature.60, 61 3.2.1 Optical Sectioning In essence, optical sectioning samples discrete planes from a continuous light signal in a three-dimensional space. This sampling proces s must satisfy the Nyquist sampling theorem,62, 63 which requires the sampling frequency to be grea ter than twice the input signal bandwidth in order to assure perfect reconstruction of the original signal from the sampled version. In the spatial domain, this requires a sampling interval to be less than half of the characteristic dimension of the source signal. A CCD camera is used to sample the discrete planes along the optical axis. The sampling interval in the axial direction ( z) is defined by the spacing between two adjacent image acquisitions. The axial resolution of a microscope is defined by 21.4zn r NA where is the light wavelength, n is the refractive index of media, and NA is the numerical aperture of the objective lens.60 To meet the requirement of the Nyquist sampling theorem, then 1 2zzr, i.e., 20.7zn NA (3-1) 3.2.2 Convolution The images acquired via optical sectioning ar e degraded for two reasons: optical blurring and image degradation due to electronic noise. Optic blurring is due to th e optical aberration of PAGE 54 54 light during its passage through the microscope optical lenses. Among optical aberration,64 chromatic aberration is insignificant because band-p ass filters are used in the optical system. Optic blurring occurs because each image taken at one focal plane is contaminated with the outof-focus information from the adjacent planes above and below the examined.60 However, this distortion is reproducible and inhe rent to the optical system and thus can be mathematically corrected. The optical aberration of light in the optical system can be mathematically expressed as a convolution of the object (i.e., the fluorescein solution in the channe l in this case) with a spatial function called the point spread function (PSF), which is the thr ee-dimensional image recorded by the microscopy when the input is a point source.60, 61 As the most fundamental characteristic of an imaging system, PSF can be viewed as th e impulse response functio n of a microscope in the spatial domain (see Appendix A). The resultan t 3D image of a point source is thus defined by PSF, hence the intensity at any po int in the image is a weighted sum of all the point sources in the channel. A mathematical description of th is image formation proces s is given by a spatial convolution, i.e., a volume integration over sp ace, of the spatial function of fluorescein concentration in the channel and the PSF of the microscope.60 As a result, the images taken from the microscope deviate from the real fluorescen ce intensity. A deconvolution process must be undertaken to reconstruct the images by deblurring the image. As mentioned above, the other source of the image degradation is photonic and electronic noise during image acquisition. The electronic no ise of the CCD camera can be rectified by a bias image, which is taken by the camera when light to the camera is completely blocked. Nonuniformity of light source can be corrected by a flat-field image, which is taken when a fluorescein solution with uniform thickness is illu minated with the UV lamp of the microscope. PAGE 55 55 The flat-field image also compensates for any variat ion in the sensitivity of different pixels in the CCD camera. These images will also be us ed in the deconvolution process to reduce both photonic and electronic noises. 3.2.3 Deconvolution A variety of deconvolution algorithms has b een developed to remove the blurring and noise in images acquired via opti cal sectioning. These algorithms can be classified into three groups: inverse filter,65 constrained iteration,66-69 and blind deconvolution.70 Two implementations of the constrained iteration are investigated, name ly the Gold algorithm67 and the maximum likelihood estimation (MLE) by Richardson and Lucy68, 69. Mathematical description of each algorithm is summarized in Appendix B, and the advantages and disadvantages of each method, as well as essential references, are listed in the Table 3-1. These methods are used and compared for microflow visual ization, and then the be st one is chosen for the mixing study as explained in the Results and Discussion. 3.3 Experimental Methodology 3.3.1 Experimental Setup A plastic device (Figure 2-4) with ridged channels is fabricated as described in Section 2.1. It is connected to a syringe pump (KDS 100, KD Scientific, Holliston, MA) via the Nanoport kit (Upchurch, Oak Harbor, WA). Fluorescein solution (1 M) is pumped into the device at a preset flow rate (5.2 L/min., or 2.3 cm/s based on the crosssectional area). Using the hydraulic diameter of the channel and 3.3 x 10-6 cm2/s as the diffusion coefficient of fluorescein,71 the Peclet number19 of this flow is 3.9 x 103. The device is placed on the sample stage of an inverted microscope (IX51, Olympus America Inc, Melvill e, NY), which is equipped with a 75W xenon lamp (U-LH75X). A 20x objective lens (Olympus) w ith a numerical aperture of 0.5 is used. The light pass through an excitation filter (HQ480/ 40, Chroma Technology, Rockingham, VT), a PAGE 56 56 beam splitter, and an emission filter (HQ535/50, Chroma Technology), and then is collected by a scientific-grade, cooled CCD camera (2184 x 1472 pixels, Apogee, Auburn, CA). The CCD pixel size is 6.8 m x 6.8 m. 3.3.2 Optical Sectioning and Image Reconstruction Prior to the acquisition of sample images, both bias and flat-field images are collected for optical calibration of the microscopy The bias image is taken with the camera shutter closed; it is used for rectifying the noise level of the CCD camera. The fl at-field image is taken when a fluorescein solution is contained between two flat glass slides and illuminated with the UV light; it is then used for calibrating the uneven UV illumination and the variation in the sensitivity of different regions of the camera. To collect images via optical sectioning, the mi croscope objective lens is moved in steps of 1 m along the optical axis to acquire consecu tive images. A total distance of 80 m is displaced in the optical axial direction, ensuring a full sampling of the 40-m-deep channel and enough information from the out-of-focus neighboring region. The stack of 80 imag es, together with the bias and the flat-field imag es, are then imported into AutoDeblur and AutoVisualize (AutoQuant Imaging Inc, Troy, NY) for deconvol ution analysis. A variety of deconvolution algorithms are studied, including the inverse filter, Gold, MLE, and blind MLE. A Dell computer with Intel Pentium 4 processor (OptiPlex GX270) is used for computation. 3.4 Results and Discussion 3.4.1 Optical Sectioning As discussed in Section 3.2, th e sampling interval in the optical axis must meet the Nyquist sampling theorem defined by Equation 3-1. Th e sampling distance in the axial direction ( z) is 1 m, which is the adjustment step of the mi croscope objective lens. Using 520 nm for the emission wavelength of fluorescein, 0.5 for NA of th e lens used, and 1 for the refractive index of PAGE 57 57 air, the axial resolution of the microscope ( rz) is calculated to be 2.9 m. Therefore, our experiment condition meets the requir ement of Nyquist sampling theorem, 1 2zzr. Fluorescein solution is first pumped into the microchannel from both inlets (wells 1 and 2 in Figure 2-2). As a result, uniform fluores cence signals should be observed in the mixing channel connected to well 3. This serves as a test case to assess the ac curacy of each algorithm. Using the optical sectioning described in Secti on 3.3, images are acquired in the region with smooth surfaces and in the region with ridges. Figure 3-2 shows the three-dimensional view of the fluorescein flow in the channel by stacking al l images together in sequence. Figure 3-2a is from the region with smooth surfaces while Figu re 3-2b is from the region with ridges. Although both images roughly indicate the image of the fluorescein flow (i.e., the shape of the channel), blurred edges and a hazy background are obvious. As explained in Section 3.2, these optical distortions result from the aberrati on of the fluorescent em ission, and photonic and electronic noise. Therefore, d econvolution is performed to rec tify these effects, obtaining the correct fluorescent intensity values at the points in the channel and reconstructing the actual image of the corresponding fluorescein flow. 3.4.2 Deconvolution As discussed previously in Section 3.2, the bias image and the flat-field image are first obtained for optical calibration of the microsc opy. These calibration images, as well as the image stack in Figure 3-2a, are imported into the deconvolution software, AutoDeblur. The raw images are offset by the bias image and then normalized by the flat-field images. A variety of deconvolution algorithms are then investigat ed for reconstructing the images, including the inverse filter, Gold, MLE, and blind MLE algor ithms mentioned above. A theoretical PSF (see PAGE 58 58 Appendix A) is used except for the blind MLE algorithm, which does not require an estimate of the PSF. Figure 3-3 shows the images afte r deconvolution using different algorithms. Each image is constructed as a yz-plane, the cro ss-sectional view of the regular channel in Figure 3-3a. Due to isotropic etching, a D-shaped channel should be observed in the yz-pla ne as indicated by the dashed line in each image. As explained in Table 3-1 and in the literature,60 the inverse filter deconvolution causes many artifacts as expected (Figure 3-3b). The strips in Figure 3-3c indicate that the Gold algorithm exhibits sl ow convergence and suffe rs from constructive artifacts.60 The results in Figures 3-3d to 3-3g s uggest that the MLE and blind MLE deliver better results, even though they take longer computation time (~30 minutes compared to a few seconds on same computer). When the number of iterations is increased from 30 to 60, the blind deconvolution algorithm generates ev en better results than the M LE. The corrected image after 60 iterations of the blind MLE is the closest to the channel geometry. Therefore, the blind MLE deconvolution algorithm is chosen to study mixing as follows. Its no ted that even after reconstruction with the blind MLE deconvolution, fluorescence is still found outside of the channel geometry, indicating the incomplete rectif ication of optical distor tion. The commercial deconvolution software used in current study is not tailored for microfluidic studies. A better deconvolution algorithm can be developed for visu alizing microfluidic flows in microchannels. 3.4.3 Mixing in Ridged Channel To study mixing, fluorescein solution is now intr oduced into the microchannel at well 1 of the device in Figure 3-4a, and pressurized water is introduced at well 2. The two streams merge at the intersection M, travel thr ough the ridges in the channel, and finally exit at well 3. The top view of the first 36 ridg es is in Figure 3-4a. PAGE 59 59 Figure 3-4b shows the fluorescent images acquired at five locations downstream of the point M. The locations correspond to the centers of the 1st, 12th 24th, 36th, and 48th ridge in the channel as indicated in th e figure. For each location, the raw image is the synthesized photograph by simply stacking together all pict ures taken during optical sectioning. The reconstructed image after 60 iter ations of the blind MLE for each location is shown in Figure 34c. The raw images from the first to the 48th ridge do not tell a ny trend in fluorescein distribution along the channel, wh ereas the reconstructed counterp arts indicate the twisting flow as reported previously.19, 20 The two streams, fluorescein and water, twist about the axis of the channel. The images indicate that the two stream s started to mix at 12th ridges, and a portion of fluorescein transposed to the ot her side indicated by the fluorescen ce signal at 24th ridge. When two streams travel further along the ridged channe l, mixing becomes more thorough, as indicated by the more uniform fluorescence intensity in the downstream portion of the channel (48th ridge). In addition, the r econstructed images possess much less haze and are in a better agreement with the channel geometry. The results clearly show that the reconstructed image is the better reflection of th e mixture in the channel. Using the reconstructed image in Figure 3-4c the mixing efficiency is calculated. Following Johnson et al.,20 percentage of mixing is quantified using formula 2 2 0 1111 %1NN iimixIIII NN, (3-2) where i I is the intensity value at ith pixel, I is the intensity value when solution is perfectly mixed (at infinity), and 0i I is the intensity value at ith pixel at the begi nning. The mixing percentages are 26%, 38%, 49%, an d 59% at 12th, 24th, 36th, a nd 48th ridge, respectively. These values are comparable to what reported in the literature19 for the flow with a similar Peclet number, which takes into acc ount the difference in the flow rate and geometry. PAGE 60 60 3.5 Summary Deconvolution microscopy is explored for im aging a 3D flow such as mixing in a microfluidic device. Compared to confocal fluorescence microscopy that is often used for visualizing a 3D flow, the d econvolution microscopic imaging employs a widely-available conventional optical microscope. Optical sectioni ng is straightforward for acquiring a series of images at different focal planes, and the deconvolution can simply be carried out by commercially available software. A variety of deconvolution algorithms may be used to reconstruct the corrected 3D image, depending on the optical setup, time allowed, and computational power available. After compar ison among a number of d econvolution algorithms, it is found that the blind MLE deconvolution gave the best results fo r this microchannel application. Deconvolution microscopy can be used to study mixing in a ridged channel of a microfabricated device. The crea tion of ridges in the microchannel is accomplished by judicious design and isotopic etching. D econvolution microscopy is exploite d to confirm the presence of the twisting flow in a ridged channel. Although the ridges in the channel of this work are different from the microfabricated rectangular microwells in the channel reported in the literature,19, 37 the resultant flow patterns are similar. Mixing is evident from the experimental results using streams of fluorescein and water. Flow twisting due to th e addition of the ridge structures is proved to be effective in fluid mixing in microfluidic systems. PAGE 61 61 Table 3-1. Comparison of deconvolution algorithms Methods Description Pros Cons References Inverse filter Transfers images from spatial domain to Fourier domain Simple and fast, requires less computation Sensitive to noise, induces artificial defects, requires PSF 65 Constrained iteration Gold MLE Reconstructs images in a successive process under a variety of constraints Less susceptible to noise Requires more computation and PSF 66-69 Blind deconvolution Reconstructs images with an estimated PSF in an iterative process under constraints Less susceptible to noise, does not require PSF Is the most computationally intensive method 70 PAGE 62 62 Microchannel Adjusting focal plane Microscope objective zImage acquired by CCD (a) (b) Figure 3-1. Optical sectioning process for visualizati on of a microfluidic flow. (a) A device with a microchannel is placed on the microsc ope stage. The objective lens of an inverted microscope is moved in the axia l direction to obtain the image corresponding to a focal plane at a desired depth of mi crochannel. The image is captured by a CCD camera. (b) A stack of images are acqui red by adjusting the objective lens in a discrete step, Z, through the entire channel depth of the microchannel. There are more blurs in the images that are out of focus. PAGE 63 63 (a) (b) x y z 0 Figure 3-2. Three-dimensional view of fluorescein in a channel by stacking raw images acquired by optical sectioning. The coordinate system is defined as: x in the flow direction, y in the horizontal direc tion, and z in the vertical direction. (a) fluorescein flow in a regular channel; (b) fluorescein flow in the ridged channel. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)Raw image Blind MLE 60 iteration MLE 60 iteration Blind MLE 30 iteration MLE 30 iteration Gold 30 iteration Inverse Filter Figure 3-3. Cross-sectional image of a fluorescein flow in ridged channels. The images are reconstructed to represent th e yz-plane of Figure 3-3a. The dashed lines indicate the expected shape. From left to right, pi ctures are the raw image (a) and corrected images using inverse filter (b), Gold algor ithm with 30 iterations (c), MLE algorithm with 30 iterations (d), bli nd MLE with 30 iterations (e), MLE with 60 iterations (f), and blind MLE with 60 iterations (g). PAGE 64 64 36th 1 2 3 1st 24th 12th (a) (b) (c) 1st12th24th36th48th M Figure 3-4. Top view and cross section views of a Poiseuille flow in ridged channels. (a) Layout of ridged channel and the e xpanded view of ridges in th e channel. Two channels connecting to wells 1 and 2 merge at the intersection, M. (b, c) Cross-sectional views (yz-planes) of the fluorescein flow in ri dged channel at different locations. Two streams of fluorescent soluti on and water are pumped into the channel simultaneously from wells 1 and 2, with equal flow rate (2.3 cm/s). The location for each crosssectional view is indicated at the bott om. Views from the raw image stack are presented in (b) and views from the deconvoluted image stack are in (c). PAGE 65 65 CHAPTER 4 ELECTROOSMOTIC FLOW IN WAVY CHANNELS* 4.1 Introduction Flow recirculation is observed in EOF in ridge d channel, which is promising in enhancing fluid mixing in microchannels. In order to apply such recirculation in microfluidic mixing, we ought to explore and understand th e properties of EOF in the ridged channel. However the flow is three-dimensional and difficult to deal with A sinusoidal wavy cha nnel is chosen as the simplified form of the ridged channel. It is a 2D channel with a varyi ng channel cross section area; yet the variation is simple. So in this chapter, I shift focus temporarily from the ridged channel to the wavy channel. An analytical so lution to EOF in a wavy channel is developed. Using the exact solution, EOF can be analytically studied and hence the flow recirculation can be consequently characterized. Once the parametric study of recirculation in the wavy channel is completed, the focus is shifted back to th e recirculation in the ridged channel and the development of a microfluidic mixer using recirculation. Electroosmotic flow, a surface phenomenon, has b een investigated in this research and explored for its use in fluid mixing in microfluid ic systems. As pointed out in Chapter 1, the Reynolds number of an EOF is typi cally less than unity. As a resu lt, EOF is often in the regime of a creeping flow, thus gove rned by the Stokes equation.72 The velocity profile of an EOF in a microchannel of a constant cross-se ctional area (e.g. a channel between two parallel flat plates) is a uniform, plug-like shape, which is different from the parabolic profile in a Poiseuille flow. EOF in microfluidic devices has be en studied by many research groups.51, 73-81 In these studies, Part of this chapter has been accepted to publish in Electroosmotically driven creeping flow in a wavy microchannel, Microfluid Nanofluid in press, DOI10.1007/s10404-008-0290-8. PAGE 66 66 an electroosmotic slip velocity is often used to simplify the flow without the calculation of the flow field in the EDL.74, 76, 78, 80 While EOF is continuously exploited in a va riety of applications channels with nonuniform geometry have increasingly been designed for different microfluidic elements, including pumps,82 dispensers,83 and mixers.20 As a result, there is a gr owing need for a fundamental understanding about the effects of the geometry on the fluid motion and the associated transport properties. Although there are some efforts to ad dress this need, most of them used commercial or in-house software to search for the solu tion of EOF. Little work focuses on obtaining analytical solutions; one example is Ghosals study on the flow in a channel with slowly varying cross-sectional areas.78 The solution, however, requires the wall variation small enough to validate the lubrication approximation and perturbation expansion method. At the same time, a vast amount of studies ar e found in classic fluid mechanics studies for the creeping motion in periodic channel geometries.84-99 Various analytical and numerical methods have been employed in these studies. Ho wever, most of these creeping flows are either Poiseuille or Couette flows, in which no slip conditions are used at the boundary. They cannot be used for studying EOF. In this chapter, an exact solution to an EO F in a microchannel with a periodically varying cross-sectional area is described, with a focu s on a channel confined by a flat wall and a sinusoidal wall. The governing equations for th e EOF are simplified using the slip velocity approximation.76, 100 An exact solution to the electric potential in the microchannel is obtained by solving a Poisson equation using complex function formulation and boundary integral method. The EOF is then solved by applying the same approach to a biharmonic equation of the stream function. Using the exact solutions of th e electric potential and EOF flow, the effects of PAGE 67 67 the channel width and wave amplitude on the flow field are studied, and the similarity between the electric field and EOF velocity is examined. More interestingly, re circulation regions are predicted when a pressure gradient of sufficient strength the in opposite direction is added to the EOF in a wavy channel. The presence of the flow recirculation region is e xperimentally verified. The solution is further systema tically examined over a large ra nge of physical and geometrical parameters to determine the onset condition of th e recirculation region. The onset condition is presented in the form of (the ratio of the wave amplitude to the wavelength) as a function of h (the ratio of the channel width to the wavelength) for a given K (the ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic force). The size and shape of the recirculation region are also found to be dependent on K and h The conclusions of recirculation in wavy channels will be used as guidelines in the investigation of recirculation in ridged channels and the design of micromixer in Chapter 5. Equation Chapter (Next) Section 1 4.2 Governing Equations Lets consider a two-dimensional wavy channel of infinite length between a top flat plate and a bottom sinusoidal plate, as shown in Figur e 4-1. The average width of the channel is H the wave amplitude at the bottom wall is A and the wavelength is L Using the Cartesian coordinate system in Figure 4-1, the channel walls is expressed asyH (top flat wall), and cos(2) yAxL (bottom sinusoidal wall). The top a nd the bottom walls are both stationary. An electric field is applied along the channel, and the average el ectric potential increase over one wave length is0 (i.e., EOF from the right to the left). The pressure drop over one wave length is0P The flow is assumed to be steady, in compressible, and Newtonian. The fluid has density kinematic viscosity and electric permittivity The characteristic potential at the PAGE 68 68 edge of EDL is assumed a constant (denoted aspot ). Because the periodic channel geometry, the flow is periodic in the x-direction. The governing equations in this flow incl ude the continuity equation, momentum equations, and Poisson equation: 0 V, (4-1) 2()ep VVV (4-2) and 2 e (4-3) where (,) Vxy is the velocity vector (with u as the x component and v as the y component), (,) p xy is the pressure, (,)e x y is the electric charge density and (,) x y is the electric potential in the fluid flow. The boundary conditions are (2,)(2,) VxLyVxLy, (4-4) 0(2,)(2,) p xLypxLyP, (4-5) 0(2,)(2,) xLyxLy (4-6) and 0wallsV (4-7) In the bulk flow (also called as the ou ter flow region, relative to the double layer100), the electric charge is neutral. As a result, the Lo rentz force is dropped from the momentum Equation 4-2, which becomes the incompressible Navier-Stokes equation, 2() p VVV (4-8) and the Poisson equation (Equation 4-3) become s the Laplace equation by dropping the charge density term, PAGE 69 69 20 (4-9) Since the double layer thickness is much smaller than the channel width, the effect of the flow in the double layer (also called as the inner flow region) on the outer flow can be approximated by the slip velocity.74, 76, 78, 80, 100 The effective slip boundary condition is described by the Helmho ltz-Smoluchowski equation,14 walls wallsV (4-10) where is the electroosmotic mobility, defined in Equation 1-21 as pot To non-dimensionalize x, y, u, v, p, and in Equations 4-1, and 4-4 to 4-10, the following is introduced: [ */2 x x L */2 y y L 02/ u u L 02/ v v L 2 02 p p L 0 ]. It should be noted that the s cale of the convec tion term in the momentum equation is on th e order of Reynolds number, uL Re As EOF is typically in the regime of a creeping flow where 1 Re the inertial term is then dropped from the momentum equation (Equation 4-8), *2* p V. (4-11) For clarity, the superscript stars in the dime nsionless variables ar e dropped hereinafter.101 To characterize the effects of the channel geomet ry, two dimensionless para meters related to the channel geometry are introduced: scaled wave amplitude 2 AL (the ratio of the wave amplitude to the wavelength, the characteristic slope of the sinusoidal wall) and scaled channel width 2 hHL (the ratio of the channel width to the wavelength).96 By using a stream function (,) x y and taking the curl of the momentum equation (Equation 4-11), a biharmonic equation for is obtained, PAGE 70 70 40. (4-12) For the given solution domain as shown in Fi gure 4-2a, the resulti ng non-dimensionalized boundary conditions include the following equations, (,)(,) x yxy (4-13) 2 0 02 (,)(,) PL pxypxy (4-14) walls 0 t, (4-15) walls walls nt, (4-16) (,)(,)1 xyxy (4-17) and 0wallsn, (4-18) where tn are the unit vectors in the tangential and no rmal directions with the respect to the walls. 4.3 Formulation of Solutions Since (,) x y is uncoupled from (,) x y it can be solved separately from Equation 4-9 with boundary conditions given by Equations 4-17 and 4-18. Subsequently, (,) x y can be obtained by solving Equation 4-12 with the boun dary conditions (Equations 4-13 to 4-16). 4.3.1 Electric Potential Using complex functions,102 a general solution to the Lapl ace equation (Equation 4-9) is written as, (,)2[()] xyAxG (4-19) where 22 yix is a complex variable; and denote the real and imaginary parts of a complex value; A is a real constant; () G is an arbitrary analytical periodic complex function satisfying the periodic boundary conditions in the x-direction (22) Gyxi PAGE 71 71 (22) Gyxi. By substituting Equation 4-19 into the periodic boundary condition (Equation 4-17), A can be simply determined as 12 A The complex function () G can be expressed as an inte gral along the channel boundary based on Cauchy integral formula,103 1()1() ()()() 2()2() GxGx Gxdxxdx ixix (4-20) where ()(()), ()(())GxGxGxGx and the complex functions ()()2 x hix and ()cos2 xxix are the profiles of top and bottom walls in the complex plane. Substituting the complex function (,) x y given by Equation 4-19 into the boundary condition in Equation 4-18, and em ploying Cauchy-Riemann equations, ()() GiG xy (4-21) We have [()]0 d Gx dx (4-22) at the top flat wall and 1 sin()2[()]0 2 d xGx dx (4-23) at the bottom sinusoidal wall. In order to determine uniquely the complex function () G additional equations are needed to complete Equations 4-22 and 423. We define a series of analytic complex functions ()exp(2)nFn (4-24) where n. Note that ()()nFG is an analytic function, since ()nF and () G are both analytic. Based on Cauchy integral theorem, the integral of an analytic complex function on a closed contour (path ABCDA in Figure 4-2b) is zero, PAGE 72 72 ()()0n ABCDAFGd (4-25) As both ()nF and () G have a period of 2 the integral along BC bala nces the integral along DA. Hence the sum of integrals along path AB and CD is zero, exp(2())()()exp(2())()()0 nxGxxdxnxGxxdx (4-26) Equations 4-22, 4-23 and 4-26 form a complete set of equations to solve () Gx and () Gx. The detailed solving procedure is detailed in Appendix C. () G is subsequently obtained from Equation 4-20, and (,) x y is determined from Equation 4-19. Since the electric field is defined as E the tangential electric field strength along walls, which is used in solving st ream function, is obtained from 1 ()2[()] 2td ExGx dx (4-27) and 221 2[()] 2 () 1sin()td Gx dx Ex x (4-28) 4.3.2 Stream Function The same approach is also used to obta in the solution of the biharmonic equation (Equation 4-12). Using the periodic boundary co ndition (Equation 4-13), a general solution to the biharmonic equation is written as, 23(,)()()()() xyByCyRRyQQ (4-29) where() R and () Q are arbitrary periodic analytical functions satisfying the periodic boundary conditions in the x-direction (22)(22) R yxiRyxi and (22)(22) QyxiQyxi; B and C are real-valued constants.96, 102 Using Equations 4-14, 4-21 and 4-29, th e pressure can be expressed as PAGE 73 73 (,)6()()cpxypCxiQQ (4-30) where c p is a reference pressure, an arbitrary constant, and () Q is the derivative of () Q with respect to From the periodic boundary condition in Equation 4-14, the constant C is determined as 12 K C (4-31) where 2 0 02 PL K (4-32) is a dimensionless parameter repr esenting the ratio of pressure force to el ectrokinetic body force in the fluid flow. Therefore, the stream f unction (Equation 4-29), pre ssure (Equation 4-30), and velocities are expressed as, 23(,)2()() 12 K xyByyRyQ (4-33) (,)2() 2cK pxypQ (4-34) 2(,)22[()]2[()]2[()] 4 K uxyByyRQyQ xx (4-35) and (,)2[()]2[()] vxyRyQ xx (4-36) Using the Cauchy integral formula, () R and () Q can be written as 1()1() ()()() 2()2() RxRx R xdxxdx ixix (4-37) and 1()1() ()()() 2()2() QxQx Qxdxxdx ixix (4-38) PAGE 74 74 where()(()) R xRx, ()(()) R xRx, ()(()) QxQx, and ()(()) QxQx. Substituting Equation 4-33 into Equations 4-15 and 4-16, the boundary conditi ons at the top flat wall yield [()][()]0 dd RxhQx dxdx, (4-39) and 21 [()][()][()]() 42tKdd B hhRxQxhQxEx dxdx (4-40) And at the bottom periodical wall, we have 23cos()cos()2()2cos()()0 12 K BxxRxxQx (4-41) and 2cos()cos()[()][()]cos()[()] 4 Kdd B xxRxQxxQx dxdx 221 ()1sin() 2tExx. (4-42) Taking Cauchy integrals for ()()nFR and ()()nFQ along a contour ABCDA shown in Figure 4-2b, the integral in this closed contour is zero according to the properties of an analytic function. Since th e integral along BC cancels the in tegral along DA, the sum of integrals along path AB and CD is zero: exp(2())()()exp(2())()()0 nxRxxdxnxRxxdx (4-43) and exp(2())()()exp(2())()()0 nxQxxdxnxQxxdx (4-44) Equations 4-39 to 4-44 form a comple te set of equations to solve () R x, () R x, () Qx, and () Qx. () R and () Q are then obtained from equations Equation 4-37 and 4-38, and subsequently substituted into equation 4-29 to yield the desired (,) x y PAGE 75 75 To recapitulate, the problem of solving the harmonic and biharmonic equations has been reduced to solving a set of one-dimensional periodi c functions. They can be solved efficiently by using highly accurate spectral (Fourier series) me thod. The solution to the set of the complex periodic functions ( x )={() Gx, () Gx, () R x, () R x, () Qx, and () Qx} can be sought in the form of Fourier series as ()exp()m m x imx (4-45) where {,,,,,}mmmmmmmggrrqq are the respective Fourier coefficients. In the absence of singularity of the field variable s, the series solution converges exponentially. Hence only 10-40 terms of the Fourier series are typically needed, depending on the values of ( K h ), to ensure that the error in the solutions for the electric and velocity fields do not exceed a predefined threshold value (10-8 in this study). For the infinite interval of integration de fined in Equations 4-20, 4-37 and 4-38, the interval is split into three parts: (,Lint), [Lint, Lint], and ( Lint, ). The middle interval, [Lint, Lint], is bounded so that it can be accurately and efficiently evaluated using the built-in adapative quadrature routine based on Simpsons rule in the MATLAB. In the present study, Lint = 1,024 and a tolerance of 10-8 are used. For the unbound intervals, the details of the evaluation of the velocity are illustrated below. From Equation 4-35 (,) uxy can rewritten as 21 (,)2int_u() 42 K uxyByyd i (4-46) where the integrand is 22()()()() int_u()()()2 ()() ()() RRQQ zz zz 22()() ()() ()() QQ y zz ()2 zyix PAGE 76 76 Typically, an asymptotic behavior, 23 23int_() ~// 2 u aa i is clearly established for 10 For 100 the asymptotic approximati on becomes a very accurate representation of the integrand. Hence, to ensure sufficient overall accuracy, Lint = 1,024 is used and int2 int1 int_u()~ 2La d iL The constant 2a depends on ,,, Khbut can be reliably determined for each set of position, flow condition, and geometric parameters via a simple polynomial fit for large values of using 1/ as a variable. The leading order asymptotic error of the integration is estimated to be 3 2 int2 a L which is close to 10-8 for 2a< 0.8 (as is the case in the present study) and Lint = 1,024 The detailed solution procedures for m in Equation 4-45 are prov ided in the Appendix C. 4.4 Results and Discussion 4.4.1 Electric Potential The electric potential distri bution in a wavy channel depends on the scaled channel width ( h ) and the scaled wave amplitude ( ) as illustrated by the plot of equipotential lines (Figures 43 and 4-4). The plots are based on the assumption that a fluid with uniform properties is filled in the channel, a uniform zeta potential exists on the channel walls. Figure 4-3 shows the variation in the electric potential di stribution as a function of while the h is fixed at 2.5. The baseli ne is in Figure 4-3a when th e wave amplitude is zero (i.e., the bottom wall is also flat). Th e exact solution gives a series of equidistant parallel lines normal to the channel walls. Therefore, the electric fi eld strength is uniform with the same magnitude along walls, as shown in Fi gures 4-3e (top wall) and 4-3f (bottom wall) when 0 When the PAGE 77 77 bottom wall becomes corrugated as in Figure 4-3b to 4-3d, the equipotentia l lines spread out. The electric field strength at bot h walls becomes uneven as indicat ed in Figures 4-3e (top wall) and 4-3f (bottom wall) when 0 The result also predicts that the electric field strength is strong at the neck area ( x ) and weak at the trough (0x ). The variation of the electric field strength increases with the wa ve amplitude of the bottom wall. In addition, the variation for the wavy bottom wall (Figure 4-3f) is larger than for the flat top wall (Figure 4-3e). Figure 4-4 shows the effect of the channel wi dth on the electrical fi eld distribution in a wavy channel. The scaled width of channel, 2hHL varies from 0.6 to 5 while the scaled wave amplitude, 2AL is fixed at 0.5. As h increases, the top wall is further away from the bottom wave wall. As a result, the equipoten tial lines spread more uniformly. The electric strength profile at top flat wall is approaching uniform ( h > 2.5 in Figure 4-4e), while the profile at bottom wall approaches a sinusoidal shape ( h > 2.5 in Figure 4-4f). This result can be explained by the fact that the electric potential distribution at the walls is more dominated by the local geometry when they are further apart. 4.4.2 Flow Velocity An EOF at a very small Reynolds number can be viewed as a cr eeping flow with the velocity of its moving boundaries being proportiona l to the electr ic field strength at the wall surface. The geometric parameters, and h, directly affect the flow in the wavy channel in the absence of electric field; the superposition of the electric field E, which also depends on and h in addition to the zeta potent ial, compounds th e influence of and h on the flow pattern. A major focus is thus to use the exact solution to elucidate the effects of and h on the flow pattern and its interplay with the imposed electric field. PAGE 78 78 Figure 4-5 shows the effect of the scaled wave amplitude, on the streamlines and velocity field for 2.5 h and K = 0 ( P0 = 0). In Figure 4-5a to 4-5d, the streamlines of an EOF conform to the curvature of the walls of any wave amplitude, and there is no flow separation observed even when the bottom wall is strongly m odulated. The absence of flow separation is also confirmed by the velocity prof iles in Figure 4-5e to Figure 4-5h. There is no backflow in the plot of velocities when the wave amplitude in creases. In contrast, flow separation has been reported in a creeping Poiseuille flow and creepin g Couette flow in wavy channels of large wave amplitude in the absence of an electric field by other researchers.91, 95, 97, 104 The difference between electroosmosis-driven and pressure-driven flows lies in the fact th at the electric field provides a sufficient near-wall momentum in an el ectroosmosis-driven flow to prevent any back flow near the wall and makes the near-wall flow separation impossible to develop. Figure 4-6 shows the effect of the channel width on th e velocity field in a wavy channel. The scaled width of channel, h varies from 0.6 to 5 while the scaled wave amplitude, is fixed at 0.5. As h increases, the streamline pattern simply becomes more uniform (Figure 4-6a), so does the velocity profile of the EOF. Again, ther e is no flow separation obse rved in all cases. It should be noted that the lack of flow separation, i.e., the absence of a dead volume, is a desirable feature of the EOF when it is used for electropho resis and other applica tions in microfluidic devices. The effect of the channel geometry on the flow rate of EOF is also studied. Figure 4-7 shows the flow rate as a function of h with different h The flow rate is normalized against the regular channel with same cha nnel width. The result indicates that the flow rate decreases at a parabolic rate for small amplitudes, and at a quasi -linear rate for large amplitudes. As the wave PAGE 79 79 amplitude is approaching to the channel width ( h 1), the gap between the top and bottom walls diminishes and the flow rate drops close to zero. 4.4.3 Similarity between Flow Ve locity and Electric Field The similarity between the flow velocity and the electric field is examined and shown in Figure 4-8. The data suggests a high similarity between the plot of the electric field and the streamline pattern. This similarity also exists be tween the electric field vectors and the velocity vectors. The similarity between the elec tric field and the EOF velocity field of arbitrary channel geometry has been mathematically and experimentally verified.80, 100 The following assumptions are made for verification, in cluding (1) the cha nnel walls possess a constant uniform zeta potential; (2) no singularity exists at channel wall profile; and (3) there is a negligible applied pressure gradient in EOF. Since E Poisson equation (Equati on 4-9) is rewritten as 0E (4-47) According to Faradays law of induction, the curl of an electric field equals to the vector rate of decrease of magnetic flux density with time, which is typically negligible in EOF. Hence, the curl of the electric field is zero, 0E (4-48) For channels with uniform zeta potential, th e boundary conditions in Equations 4-16 and 418 become wallswallsEV (4-49) and 0wallsnE (4-50) PAGE 80 80 The hypothesized solution (VE ) are examined by plugging it back to the governing equations and the boundary conditions in Equati ons 4-11 to 4-18. Employing the assumptions and the properties of E in Equations 4-47 to 4-50, it is found that the governing equations are satisfied and the boundary conditions are met. Hence the solution VE is a valid solution, and as a result0 V The electroosmotic flow velocity fiel d is thus a conserva tive vector field, meaning the EOF is irrotational. This explains why a flow separation is absent in EOF in a wavy channel whereas a creeping Poiseuille or Couett e flow in the same wavy channel may experience as mentioned in Section 4.4.2. However, the similarity fails to hold when heterogeneity is present in the zeta potential of channel walls or wh en an external pressure is applied, where flow recirculation may occur.34, 35, 77, 105 4.4.4 Vorticity in Electroosmotic Flow As pointed in previous section that 0 V is valid everywhere in EOF, implying vorticity is zero throughout the el ectroosmotic flow (except inside ED L). This is true not only to EOF in the wavy channel, but to EOF in any shape of channels. To explai n this, lets consider a 2D, incompressible, barotropic flow of fluid with constant viscosity and permittivity, and subject to a slipping wall ( wallwallVVt ). The momentum equation for EOF is 21eDV pV Dt (4-51) At the channel surface, the momentum equati on in tangential direction is rewritten as following, where wallV n is the vorticity at the surface. wall pressure gradientwall electric field acceleration of surfacevelocity gradientof surface1 wallewall wall wallwallwall wallwallVV p V ntttt (4-52) The formula implies that vorticity that diffuses toward the EOF at the channels comes from PAGE 81 81 the acceleration of the wall, the tangential pressure gr adients along the boundary, the tangential electric fi eld along the boundary, or the tangential velocity gradient of the boundary. The first and the last sources are zero when th e boundary is stationery in most situations, such as the EOF in the wavy channel discussed in this work. Hence, vorticity is generated at the surface by the induced pressure gradient and the wall electric field, and they generate equal amount but opposite tone of vorticity, resulting the net production of vorticity zero at the channel surface. Hence the vorticity insi de the channel remains zero. When the boundary is moving, the vorticity ge neration at the channel wall surface has to include the tangential acceleration and the tangential velocity gradient. For example in the EOF with the effective slipping boundary condition, the Helmholtz-Smoluchowski velocity is assumed at the edge of the electric double laye r, and the entire fluid is assumed electrically neutral (0e ). The wall pressure gradient and the velocity gradient of boundary become the sources of vorticity in EOF. Again, thei r vorticity production cancels each other and zero vorticity enter into the EOF from the channel surface. As a result, vorticity is zero everywhere in the EOF. 4.4.5 Electroosmotic Flow with Pressure Gradients The discussion in Sections 4.4.1-4.4.4 pertains to an electroosmosisdriven flow with no external pressure applied. When an external pressure drop is present, the resulting flow can be viewed as superposition of a Po iseuille flow and the EOF, since the governing equation in a creeping flow is a linear ordinary differential equation. Figure 4-9a shows the velocity profile of an EOF in a wavy channel of scaled width h = 2.84 and scaled wave amplitude 0.45 while the velocity profile of the pressure driven flow in the same channel is illustrated in Figure 4-9b. PAGE 82 82 Note that the EOF is from right to the left based on the bounda ry condition defined in Equation 4-6 whereas the pressure-driven flow is from th e left to the right based on the boundary condition defined in Equation 4-5. The ratio of the pressu re drop (Figure 4-9b) to the electric potential difference (Figure 4-9a) is 2 K A negative K value indicates that one of these two flows is reversed and they move in the same direction. The superposition of the EOF and the Poiseuille flow in the same direction results in a co mbined flow, that is shown in Figure 4-9c for the velocity profile and in Figure 4-9d for the stream line. The combined flow possesses a quadratic velocity profile, which is different from the EO F. The combined flow also possesses finite velocity at the wall, which is different from no slip condition in the pressure driven flow. It is interesting to observe the presence of recirculation wh en the EOF is superposed in the opposition direction with th e pressure driven flow ( K = 2), as shown in Figures 4-9e and 4-9f. The velocity profile in Figure 4-9e indicates th e presence of a backflow, while the streamline pattern in Figure 4-9f shows the presence of reci rculation region where two series of eddies are observed at the top of the trough area and the bottom of the neck area of the wavy channel respectively. This is different from the flow separation in a typical cr eeping Couette flow or Poiseuille flow in wavy channe ls that occurs in the bottom of trough area due to the adverse pressure gradient.91, 95, 97 The formation of the recirculation region in Fi gure 4-9f is the result of the interaction between the pressure driven flow and electroosmotic flow in channels of varying cross sections. As shown in Figure 4-9e, the superimposed flow experiences backflow at the center of the channel when the maximum velocity of the pressure driven flow exceeds the EOF velocity. Two separation bubbles can be easily identified in the flow. They form mainly as a result of PAGE 83 83 competition between the EOF and the pressure dr iven flow in the opposite direction. The specific pattern and size of the bubbles depend on the values of K and h as discussed later. Visual studies have also been carried out to verify the presence of the recirculation region as predicted by the solution, as shown in Figur e 4-10. The experiment is performed in a microchannel in the poly(dimethylsiloxane) devi ce fabricated by following the procedure in the Chapter 2. The channel is filled with wate r containing latex beads of 0.75-micron diameter (Polyscicence, Inc.). The pressure gradient is provided by the difference (43.3 mm) in the solution level in reservoirs. Fi gure 4-10a shows the velocity pr ofile corresponding to the case in Figure 4-9c. The velocity is calculated from two consequent images (w ith an interval of 33 milliseconds) acquired by a CCD camera. Commerci al particle imaging velocimetry software (PIVview, PIVTEC GmbH) is used to generate the velocity field of the flow. Figure 4-10b shows the pathlines of beads generated by ove rlapping 60 consequent images, corresponding to the case in Figure 4-9f. The experimental re sult exhibits a qualitative agreement with the theoretical solution. 4.4.6 Onset of Recirculation The onset of flow recirculation depends on th e channel geometry and the magnitude of the applied pressure drop relative to the electrokinetic force. It is observed that when the applied pressure drop slightly exceeds a threshold value, a small isolated bubble forms half way between two walls near the neck region and the u-compon ent velocity becomes slightly positive over a small region along the y -direction. Figure 4-11 shows the streamlines of the flow in a wavy channel with K at 0, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.25, 2, and 4.2 when 0.45 and h = 2.84. No recirculation region is present when K is zero (Figure 4-11a). Recircul ation appears in the channel when K reaches a threshold value. It starts to occur at the neck region (Figure 4-11c), and then form a separate bubble in the trough region (Figure 4-11d). As K increases further, the recirculation PAGE 84 84 region expands (Figure 4-11e), then shrinks (Figures 4-11f and 411g), and finally diminishes to the channel walls when the flow is completely dominated by the pressure-driven flow. Since the combination of the pressure gradient and the electrokinetic force in the opposite direction will always produce a local maximum, maxu in the u-profile at the neck, the condition for which max0 u at x is taken as the onset of the recirculation flow. To compute maxu for a given set of ( K h ), the velocity profile at x is computed at 10 locations in the y direction. A polynomial fit for u ( y ) is then obtained based on t hose 10 data. A preliminary location, y of the maximum u is identified. The velocities at five location near y are computed using very small interval size and a mu ch more refined polynomial fit is obtained for the velocity profile near y. Subsequent determination of the true maximum velocity, maxu and its location, max y contain very small interpolation error. Figure 4-12 shows the velocity profil es at the neck as a function of K used in Figure 4-11. The data supports the conclusion that the onset of the recircula tion bubbles starts when a flow opposite to EOF appears at the neck. By keeping K constant, we also examine the effects of the channel geometry represented by the scaled wave amplitude ( ) and the scaled channel width (h). When the gap between the top wall and the neck of the wavy bottom wall becomes small, i.e. either becomes large or h becomes small, EOF dominates. Hence there is no backflow, and no recirculation exists in the flow. In contrast, when becomes small or h becomes large the pressure flow dominates and recirculation occurs in the flow. Figure 4-13a shows the geom etric relationship between and h required for the onset of recirculation at K = 2. The solid black line represents the physical boundary when the neck of the wavy bottom wall touches the top wall, h As a result, only the region below this line is PAGE 85 85 physically possible in terms of the channel geom etry. The curve with circles splits entire parameter space into two zones: a recirculation zone below the curve and a recirculation-free zone between the curve and the solid line. The circles represent the data obtained from the solution. The curve starts from (0 h = 2) and approaches to the physical boundary as h increases. The wavy channel of 0.45 and h = 2.84 described in Figu res 4-9e and 4-9f does fall in the recirculation z one, consistent with the re sult shown in Figure 4-13a. Note that the intercept (0h value when 0 ) of the curve corresponds to a channel of constant cross sectional area, in which the flow ve locity at the centerline is zero due to the fact that the maximum velocity of a pressure flow ( 2 max08uPHL ) is equal to the EOF velocity ( 0 eouL ). Equating maxu to eou results in 08hK This equation can be used as the starting point of the calculation for the K curves, which separates the recirculation zone from the recirculation-free zone for the given K value. The exploded view of the K curve near the interc ept is shown in the inset of Figure 4-13a. The solid line is based on the calculated velocity profile at the neck, while the dashed line is based on the velocity profile at the trough of the wavy channel. They coincide at h = 2, but the onset conditions of recirculati on are slightly different, dependi ng on the location and geometry of the channel. As shown in Figure 4-11c, flow r ecirculation is observed on ly at the neck, but not at the trough of the channel when 0.015 h = 2 with K = 2. As a result, the diagrams in Figure 4-13 are generated by using flow reversal at the neck as the cr iteria of flow recirculation. Figure 4-13b shows the dependence of the onset of flow recirculation on the applied forces represented by the dimensionless parameter K When K is small, EOF dominates and it is difficult to have recirculation in the flow. When K is large, pressure flow dominates, recirculation easily occurs. The plot provides a means to determine the geometry and external PAGE 86 86 force requirement when recirculation is desirable. It also provides a conven ient tool to determine whether flow recirculation occurs in a wavy channel. 4.4.7 Recirculation Pattern and Size As expected, the pattern and size of reci rculation region are de pendent on the three dimensionless parameters, h, and K The pattern of the recircul ation region as a function of K is shown in Figure 4-11. Two recirculati on modes are identified when there is flow recirculation in the wavy channel. As shown in Figures 4-11d and 4-11e, type I recirculation mode consists of two series of bubbles: one ce ntered at the trough of the wavy channel and the other centered at the necks. The bubbles are locat ed near the centerline of the channel. Type II recirculation mode is displayed in Figures 4-11f and 4-11g, also consisting of two series of bubbles. However, the bubble centered at the tro ugh is close to the top plain wall whereas the bubble centered at the neck is cl ose to the bottom wavy wall. Both bubbles are spindle shaped and they are separated by flow streams in the dir ection of pressure gradie nt and in the middle of the channel. Flows in the direction of EOF lie between the bubbles and the channels walls. Significant difference exists betwee n the center streams in two types of recirculation: the center streams wind through bubbles in type I wher eas they flow smoothly in type II. The relationship between the size of recirculation region and the K value is plotted in Figure 4-14. The size is defined by the ratio of the area of recirc ulation region to the whole area of the wavy channel. The same geometry in Figure 4-11 is used and the flow patterns in Figure 4-11 are marked on the plot in Figure 4-14 with corresponding labels (a-g ). As expected, the flow is recirculation-free when K is small. As K increases to 1.1, recirculation starts to occur. The bubbles rapidly expand as K increases until it reaches 1.25, at which the recirculation region reaches the maximum size, ~52% of the tota l channel area. The bubble slowly shrinks PAGE 87 87 afterwards. As K increases toward infinity, the bubble diminishes to the channel boundary and their size approximates asymptotically to zero. Figure 4-15A shows the effect of the scaled wave amplitude ( ) on the size of recirculation region in a wavy channel. The K value is set at 2 while h is fixed at 2.84. The result indicates that recirculation occurs when 1.31 but flow becomes recirculation-free beyond the value. This result agrees with the discussion above on the onset of recirculation: recirculation occurs at small values, but not at large values. The maximum size of the recirculation region takes place when 1.08 The streamline patterns corresponding to = 0.31, 0.91, and 1.19 are shown in the insets of Figure 4-15A. The effect of the scaled channel width ( h ) on the size of recirculati on region is also studied (Figure 4-15B). The K value is set at 2 while is fixed at 0.45. The flow is recirculation-free until h = 2.0. Bubbles rapidly enlarge as h increases, and reaches to the maximum size at h = 2.2. As h further increases, the size of recircul ation region slowly decreases and drops asymptotically to zero. 4.5 Summary Using the complex function and boundary integr al formulation, an accurate method for obtaining 2D electroosmotic flow in a wavy cha nnel is developed. Effective slipping boundary conditions are employed to decouple the electrosta tic and hydrodynamic effects. Because of the flexibility of the boundary integral formulation, th is method is shown to be an effective and more accurate alternative to the lubrication theory and perturba tion method. Compared to the approximate solutions using the lubrication theory the restriction of a slow change in the wall charge or geometry is removed in the present formu lation so that the effects of arbitrary values of and h can be investigated. PAGE 88 88 The solution indicates that th e electric field strength cha nges along the wall surface as a result of the variation of the ch annel wall. A similarity exists between the flow velocity and the electric field; this verifies th e calculation result that suggests the EOF is irrotational in a wavy channel. Unlike a creeping flow driven by a pr essure gradient or a Couette flow, an EOF contains no recirculation region even with a wall of large wave amplitude. The EOF in a wavy channel can result in recirc ulation regions when a pressure gradient in the opposite direction is added. The predicati on by the analytical solu tion is confirmed by the presence of recirculation bubbles observed in ex periments. The result in a microfabricated device agrees with the similar observation in a capillary recently reporte d and studied using a perturbation method.105 The onset conditions for recirculation in a wavy channel are found to depend on one dimensionless parameter related to the external forces ( K ) and two dimensionless parameters related to the wavy channel geometry ( and h ). The results are summarized in a diagram relating recirculation to K and h The pattern and size of the recirculation region are also found to depend on these three dimensionless pa rameters. This work on the sinusoidal wavy channel is expected to help unde rstand the interaction between pressure and electrokinetic forces in an irregular geometry flow, in cluding the flow in ridged channels. PAGE 89 89 Figure 4-1. Two-dimensional wavy channel between a flat plate at the top and a sinusoidal plate at the bottom. Also indicated are the coor dinate system and the channel geometries, including wavelength L wave amplitude A and average channel width H (a) (b) Figure 4-2. Boundary conditions and contour path used in the analytical solution. (a) One period of a wavy channel with boundary condi tion at both ends. (b) Contour path for the Cauchy integral over one period of a wavy channel. PAGE 90 90 (a) = 0(b) = 0.5 (c) = 1(d) = 2 One Period (to + )Electrical Field(e) top wall (f) bottom wallOne Period (to + ) = 2 = 0.5 = 1 = 0 = 1.5 = 2 = 0.5 = 1 = 0 = 1.5 One Period (to + )Electrical Field(e) top wall (f) bottom wallOne Period (to + ) = 2 = 0.5 = 1 = 0 = 1.5 = 2 = 0.5 = 1 = 0 = 1.5 Figure 4-3. Effect of the scaled wave amplit ude on the electric potential distribution in a wavy channel ( K =0). (a-d) Equipotential line patterns. The scaled wave amplitude, changes from 0 to 2 while the channel width, h, is fixed at 2.5. (e -f) The electric field strength at the top flat wall (e) and the bottom wavy wall (f) at each wave amplitude. For clarity, data points on the lines are removed. PAGE 91 91 (a) h = 0.6(b) h= 1 (c) h = 2.5(d) h = 5 One Period (to + )Electrical Field(e) top wall (f) bottom wallOne Period (to + ) h= 0.6 h = 2.5 h = 5 h = 1 h= 0.6 h = 2.5 h = 5 h = 1 Figure 4-4. Effect of the channe l width on the electrical potential distribution in a wavy channel. (a-d) Equipotential line patterns. The channel width, h, changes from 0.6 to 5 while the wave amplitude, is fixed at 0.5. (e-f) The elec tric field strength at the top flat wall (e) and the bottom wavy wall (f) at each channel width. For clarity, data points on the lines are removed. PAGE 92 92 (a) = 0 (b) = 0.5 (c) = 1 (d) = 2 (e) = 0 (f) = 0.5 (g) = 1 (h) = 2 Figure 4-5. Effect of the scaled wave amp litude on the velocity field in a wavy channel ( K =0). (a-d) The streamline patterns of EOF. The scaled wave amplitude, changes from 0 to 2 while the channel width, h is fixed at 2.5. (e-h) Th e velocity profiles of EOF corresponding to (a) to (d). PAGE 93 93 (a) h = 0.6 (b) h= 1 (c) h = 2.5 (d) h = 5 (e) h = 0.6 (f) h= 1 (g) h = 2.5 (h) h = 5 (a) h = 0.6 (b) h= 1 (c) h = 2.5 (d) h = 5 (e) h = 0.6 (f) h= 1 (g) h = 2.5 (h) h = 5 Figure 4-6. Effect of the scaled channel wi dth on the velocity fi eld in a wavy channel ( K =0). (ad) The streamline patterns of EOF. The scaled channel width, h changes from 0.6 to 5 while the scaled wave amplitude, is fixed at 0.5. (e-h) The velocity profiles of EOF corresponding to (a-d). PAGE 94 94 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 00.20.40.60.81 h=0.5 h=1 h=2.5 h=5 0normalized flow rate Q H L A H 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 00.20.40.60.81 h=0.5 h=1 h=2.5 h=5 0normalized flow rate Q H L 0normalized flow rate Q H L A H A H Figure 4-7. Flow rate as a func tion of the ratio of wave amplitude to channel width. Flow rates are normalized against the one in a smooth ch annel with the same channel width. The channels width, h ranges from 0.5 to 5. (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) Figure 4-8. Similarity between the electric fi eld and the velocity field of an EOF in a microchannel of h = 2 and = 1, as demonstrated in (a) streamlines, (b) electric field lines, (c) velocity vectors; and (d) electric field vectors. PAGE 95 95 (a) (c) (e) (b) (d) (f) Figure 4-9. Combined flow driv en by electroosmosis and pressure (a) The veloci ty profile of an EOF in a wavy channel with channel width h = 2.84 and wave amplitude = 0.45. (b) The velocity profile of a pressure driven flow in the same channel as in (a). (c-d) The velocity profile (c) and the stream line pattern (d) of a combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure in the same di rection. The ratio of the pressure drop to the electric potential difference ( K as defined in the text) is 2. (e-f) The velocity profile (e) and the streamline pattern (f) of a combined flow driven by electroosmosis and pressure in the opposite direction; K is 2. PAGE 96 96 recirculation (a) (b) Figure 4-10. Images of microbead flow in a wa vy channel in a microfabricated PDMS device. The images are inverted; beads are represen ted by white spots. The channel width is 34.5 m, the depth is 95 m, the wavelength is 76.4 m, and the wave amplitude is 5.5 m. The flow is driven by both pressure and electroosmosis. The hydrostatic pressure results from the solution level be tween two reservoirs (43.4 mm) while the electric field strength is 800 V/ cm. (a) Image of the flow overlapped with velocity vectors that are calculated us ing velocimetry software. The pressure is applied in the same direction of the EOF. (b) Path lines of beads obtained by overlapping 60 consecutive images. EOF is in the opposite direction of the pressure gradient. The recirculation flow regions are indicated by denser bead population (more white spots). PAGE 97 97 (c) (d) (e) (d) (e) (f) (g) (a)(b) (a)(b) Figure 4-11. Streamline patterns of fluid flows in wavy channels The scaled channel width ( h ) = 2.84, and the scaled wave amplitude ( ) = 0.45. The ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic force, K = 0 (a); K =1.0 (b); K =1.1 (c); K = 1.2 (d); K = 1.25 (e); K =2 (f); and K = 4.2 (g). Two periods are plot ted for (c) to show the onset of recirculation in the neck region, but not in the trough region yet. PAGE 98 98 g f e d c b a Figure 4-12. Velocity profiles at the neck as a function of K The wavy channel is the same as in Figure 4-11, with h = 2.84 and = 0.45. The labels (a -g) correspond to the flow patterns in Figure 4-11, with K = 0 (a); K =1 (b); K = 1.1 (c); K = 1.2 (d); K = 1.25 (e); K =2 (f); and K = 4.2 (g). The profile c at K = 1.1 is when the recirculation starts with a reversal flow. 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 h K =16 K =8 K =4 K =2 K =1 K =0.5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 h 2 2.005 2.01 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 neck trough 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 h 2 2.005 2.01 0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 neck trough (b) (a) P h y s i c a l b o u n d a r yrecirculation region K = 2r e c i r c u l a t i o n f r e e r e g i o n Figure 4-13. Flow recircul ation diagram for various scaled wave amplitude ( ), scaled channel width ( h ), and the ratio of pressure force to electrokinetic force ( K ). (a) Recirculation region, recirculation-free region, and re gion for impossible channel geometry are indicated when K = 2. (inset) The exploded view of the curves near the intercept. The solid line is based on the calculated velo city profile at the neck, while the dashed line is based on the velocity profile at th e trough of the wavy channel. (b) Diagram with various K values as indicated. The bold solid line represents the physical boundary. Other curves represent the appr oximate boundary lines of recirculation zone and recirculation-free zone. PAGE 99 99 f a g b d e recirculation size ratio c f a g b d e recirculation size ratio c Figure 4-14. Size of recircul ation region as a function of K The size is represented by the ratio of area of recirculation re gion to the total area of the wavy channel. The wavy channel is the same as in Figure 11, with h = 2.84 and = 0.45. The labels (a-g) correspond to the flow patterns in Figure 11, with K = 0 (a); K =1 (b); K = 1.1 (c); K = 1.2 (d); K = 1.25 (e); K =2 (f); and K = 4.2 (g). PAGE 100 100 Figure 4-15. Size of recircul ation region as a function of and h (A) The size of recirculation region as a function of th e scaled wave amplitude, The K value is fixed at 2 while h = 2.84. The streamline patterns of fluid flows in the wavy channel are shown in the inset with = 0.31 (a), 0.91 (b), and 1.19 (c). (B) The size of reci rculation region as a function of the scaled channel width, h The K value is fixed at 2 while =0.45. The streamline patterns of fluid flows in th e wavy channel are shown in the inset with h = 2.1 (d), 3.0 (e), and 4.8 (f). PAGE 101 101 CHAPTER 5 PULSED RECIRCULATION MIXER 5.1 Introduction As discussed in Chapter 4, flow recircula tion is induced when a pressure drop and an electric potential difference are im posed in opposite directions on a fluid flow in a wavy channel. Its found that the recirc ulation is due to the competence of electrokinetic force and pressure force in the flow, and strong flow recirculati on is obtained in the fluid flow when their magnitudes are comparable, or the dimensi onless parameters related to forces ( K the ratio of the pressure force to the electrokinetic body force) is in certain range related to the channel geometry. Similar recirculation phenomenon is observed in a ridged channel, which also has a varying cross section. By properl y adjusting the external forces, fl ow recirculation is illustrated in a ridged channel by the traces of micro particle s that seeded in the fl uid flow (Figure 5-1). Note that recirculation in the ridged channel al so depends on channel geometries and the forces, like the case in a wavy channel. Equation Chapter (Next) Section 1 This phenomenon has a promising potential in enhancing the fluid mixing in microfluidic systems. A micro mixer, referred hereafter as pu lsed recirculation mixer (PRM), utilizes flow recirculation as described in this chapter. The mixing mechanism is discussed and validated using CFD simulations. Fluid mixing experiments are also c onducted in a prototype PRM to verify the simulation findings. The outline of this chapter is as follows. The characteristics of flow recirculation in ridged channels are first discussed a nd investigated using commercial CFD simulation package. The simulation results are verified by experiments of seeded fluid flow in ridged channels. A mixer based on recirculation is presen ted and its mixing scheme is discussed. Following numerical PAGE 102 102 validation of the mixing performance of the mi xer by CFD simulation, experiment of fluid mixing in a prototype PRM are carried out. Chapter 5 concludes with a summary of the proposed novel mixer. 5.2 Recirculation in Ridged Channels With the theoretical and experimental analys is of flow in a 2D wavy channel, flow recirculation is expected in a 3D ridged channe l under similar conditions, like the one in Figure 5-1. To investigate the flow recirculation in the ridged channe ls, computational fluid dynamics simulations are first performed using commerc ial CFD software, CFDACE+, before further experiments are carried out with the ridge d channels. 5.2.1 Validation of CFD-ACE+ CFD-ACE+ is a CFD and multi-physics simu lation package developed by ESI group for simulation of a wide range of a pplications, including electroosmos is. It is supported by a set of pre-processing and post-processing tools. CFD-GEOM generates ge neral geometries (either 2D or 3D) and the meshes for CFD-ACE+. CFD-MICROMESH is an automated tool for 3D geometries modeling and meshes generation, primarily for the needs of MEMS applications. Based on the 2D mask layouts and the depos ition/etching process parameters, CFDMICROMESH is capable of simulating the fabrica tion process, creating a model for the resulted geometries, and at the same time generated mesh es as specified by user. CFD-VIEW is a postprocessing tool for analyzing si mulation results from CFD-ACE+. Before proceeding to simulate flow in the ridged channel with CFD-ACE+, a quick validation is conducted to verify its capability in simulating el ectroosmosis in microchannels. Wavy channel of width of 34.5 micron, wave am plitude of 5.5 micron, and wavelength of 76.4 micron is generated using CFD-GEOM. An opposite pa ir of pressure gradie nt and electric field is applied on the model, which is solved by CFDACE+. Flow recirculation is predicted in the PAGE 103 103 wavy channel (Figure 5-2) from the streamline plot and the velocity profile, and this agrees very well with the results from the analytical soluti on developed in Chapter 4. In both cases, the dimensionless parameter K is 2. Further comparison are made between the simu lated stream function and electric potential data from CFD-ACE+ and the calculated data fr om the analytical solution. Electric potential values at 122 locations inside the wavy channel are extracted from the simulated flow, and then normalized to be in the range of 0 to 1. Another set of data are calculated at the same locations but using the analytical solution. To compare th e two sets of electric potential data, Figure 5-3a is generated with the pair of simulated and calculated data as the x and y coordinates, respectively. Similarly, Figur e 5-3b is generated based on the stream function data from the CFD simulation and the analytical solution. The near perfect linear relation in both plots suggests the good match between these two so lutions, hence CFD-ACE+ is capable of simulating electroosmosis and yielding valid solu tion to flow recirculation in microchannels. 5.2.2 Modeling of Ridged Channels A small portion of ridged channels is mode led using CFD-MICROMESH. Given the mask layout (Figure 5-4a), etching pr operties (isotropic) and desired etching depth (40 micron), the software simulates the etching process, genera tes the ridged channel model and subsequently meshes it with specified type of meshing algori thm. Figure 5-4b shows the resulting simulation model. The geometry of the ridge structure, same as the ridged channel from which the image (Figure 5-1) is acquired. The model, containing 11 ridge stru ctures, has 907,889 cells (prisms and hexahedra) and 738,236 nodes. The typical lengt h scale of an average cell structure is about 1 micron. The fluid properties and the boundary conditions including the pressure and the electric potential at both ends, and the ze ta potential at the walls, are pr operly defined. Finite volume PAGE 104 104 method is chosen in the CFD-ACE+ software settings to solve th e Navier-Stokes equation for the flow and the Poissons equation for the electric fi eld in the channel. Algebraic Multigrid Solver (AMG) is elected in solving th e linear equations for its adva ntage in solving unstructured meshing. A maximum of 1000 iteration was carried out to ensure the convergence of solution, unless a 10-4 order of reduction in the residue is met or the absolute value of the residue reaches 10-18. 5.2.3 Poiseuille Flow in Ridged Channels The experiment in Chapter 3 has shown that a segment of ridged channels can achieve a comparable mixing performance to the staggered herringbone mixer. With the model illustrated in Figure 5-4, CFD-ACE+ is employed to quant itatively evaluate the performance of the ridged channel mixer. Two distinct streams, deionized water and a solution containing 0.1 mM specimen, are introduced into the ridged channel (Figure 5-5a) at the same flow rate. Each fills half of the cross section of the entrance. The diffu sivity of specimen is set to be 3.3x10-10 m2/s. Without the ridge structures, specimen molecules gradually diffuse into water stream from their interface as the two fluids move through a regular channe l (Figure 5-5b). Complete mixing is achieved when specimen diffusion reaches from the interface of the two streams to the other side of water stream and a uniform concentration (0.05 mM ) is reached throughout of the channel cross section. The process, however, takes consider able amount of time as the molecular diffusion is generally very slow, especially for large molecules. The ridged channel is able to increase the diffu sion process by stretching and folding flows so that the distance for diffusion to reach b ecomes shorter and the interfacial area becomes larger. The mixing process in the channel is ve rified by inspecting the specimen distribution at the cross sections in CFD-VIEW (Figure 5-5c). In the cross sectional views, blue stream PAGE 105 105 represents DI water, red stream is for 0.1 mM specimen solution, and the mixture of the two streams appears white color. Also plotted ar e the contour lines calcu lated from the specimen concentration. Comparing the contour lines at th e entrance (i) to exit (iv) of the channel, its evidential that the flow has a clockwise rotati ng motion along the axis of the channel. This agrees to the experimental observation by dec onvolution microscopy presented in Chapter 3. Because of this transversal motion, flow is stre tched in the ridged channel. As a result, the segregated streams become thinner and their inte rfacial area becomes larg er. Compared to the diffusion process in a regular channel (Figure 55d), the mixing of two streams is thus improved by the ridge structures, as fewer contour lines are observed at th e exit of the ridged channel. To quantify the mixing effectiveness as a functio n of travel distance in the ridged channel, the variation of specimen concentration at cross sections and a segment of regular channel are calculated and plotte d in Figure 5-6A. 0 is the variance of specimen concentration at the entrance. At cross sections further downstr eam, lower concentration variance is achieved, indicating a thorough mixing of two streams. For example, when Pe = 450, the variation of specimen concentration reduces to 5.9 nM at th e exit of the ridged cha nnel. In comparison, without the ridge structures, the variation at the exit of a segment of regular channel of same length only drops down to 23 nM. To define th e mixing improvement by the ridged channel, we define amplification of mixing as follows, amplification of mixing = regrc where rc is the variation of concentration at th e exit of a segment of ridged channel and reg is the variation at the exit of segment of regular ch annel of same length. Hence, the segment of ridged channel delivers a roughly 4-fold mixing amplifica tion to flows at Pe = 450. The amplification of mixing of the segment of ridged channel contai ning 11 ridges is plotted as a PAGE 106 106 function of ln(Pe) in Figure 5-6B. A linear relation is found between the am plification and the logarithm of Peclet number of flow. As th e Peclet number increases, the ridged channel becomes less effective in fluid mixing. This can be explained by that a flow with a larger Peclet number becomes more dominated by the streamwise convection, a nd the mixing eff ect from flow twisting becomes negligible. 5.2.4 Flow Recirculation Intensity To induce flow recirculation, pressure and el ectric field are simultaneously imposed on the ridged channel model. In the simulation, the pre ssure gradient is applie d by fixing the pressure at inlet zero and imposing a finite pressure, P, at the outlet, so that the pressure flow is from right to left in the top view, as illustrated in Figure 5-7a. The electric field is imposed by setting a finite electric potential, V, on the inlet of ridged channel model, while keeping the outlet grounded all the time. The resulting EOF in the cha nnel is from left to ri ght in the top view of the flow (Figure 5-7b). In the simulation, the electroosmotic mobility is set as 4.8x10-8 m2/s. CFD-VIEW is used to analyze the flow field and visualize th e calculated streaklines in the flow. Particle streaks were calc ulated from the simulated flow fi eld. A total of 141 streaklines are generated in the flow, each of which represents the trajectory of a ma ssless particle travels with the flow. The particles are released from an array of locations near the ridge structure (Figure 5-4c). The streaklines are calculated by connecting 500 segments of 1-millisecond travel distance. Figure 5-7 shows the simulated tr ajectories and flow velocity pr ofiles in a Poiseuille flow and an electroosmotic flow in the ridged channel. Quadratic velocity profil e is identified in the pressure driven flow, so are the front of the stre aklines. In the EOF, the velocity profile has a much more uniform profile, so that all the part icles travel about equal distance with the same time lapse. No flow recirculati on is observed in both fl ows. Similar to what we predicted in a PAGE 107 107 flow in a 2D wavy channel, the creeping electr oosmotic/Poiseuille flow in a slow varying channel doesnt have any backflows, hence no fl ow recirculation occurs However in case both pressure and electric filed are imposed simultane ously on the fluid in th e ridged channel, flow recirculation takes place ar ound the ridge structures. The flow recirculation is expect ed to be related to the ratio of electrokinetic force and the pressure force in the flow. Inherited from the study of recirculation in 2D wavy channel, the dimensionless parameter 22 004KPL (Equation 4-32), repres ents the ratio of imposed pressure drop to electric potential di fference on the fluid in the ridged channel. K is zero when zero pressure drop is applied, and the electroosmotic flow prevails; K becomes infinity in case that zero electric field is im posed on the fluid flow, he nce the pressure flow dominates. With the combination of different P and V, a total of 18 flows of different K are simulated, and the boundary conditions are summarized in Table 5-1. Figure 5-8 illustrates the streaklines in the ri dged channels of some cases listed in Table 51. Its clear that the variation of flow recirculation is similar to that observed in a wavy channel. In the two extreme cases (Figures 5-16a and 5-1 6g), flow recirculation is rarely observed from the streaklines. While in cases where K is a moderate number (Figures 5-16b to 5-16f), the circulating streaklines become obvious, implying th e presence of flow r ecirculation. Based on the simulation results, with current ridged channe l geometry, flow recirculation is significant when K is in the range from 1.8 to 20, and it reaches strongest state when K approximates 4.5, where the net flow rate is r oughly about zero in the channel. 5.2.5 Experiment Validation To validate the numerical predictions of flow recirculation in ridge d channels, a set of experiments are conducted on the ridged channels The fabrication and parameter of ridged PAGE 108 108 channels is described in Chapte r 2. Deionized water seeded with submicron latex particles is pumped into a ridged channel, and an electric field is app lied on the fluid opposite to the direction of the Poiseuille flow Time-lapse images of the flow are acquired by a CCD camera, and are overlapped to obtain the pathlines of the micro-particles in the flow. The parameter K is adjusted by changing the amplitude of the imposed electric field. Figure 5-9 shows the variation of recirculation with respect to K in experiment, which agrees fairly well to the numerical predictions (Figure 5-8). Str ong recirculation is obtained in flows with parameter K roughly in the range in the neighbor hood of 5.8. The recirculation becomes weak as K increases to a large va lue. It vanishes when K decreases to zero. The minor discrepancy between the CFD simulation and expe riments may result from the deformation of channel prototype caused by fabrication, and/or the errors during the analysis. 5.3 Mixing by Recirculation It has been validated both numerically and e xperimentally that the construction of ridge structures on channel walls can cause flow twisti ng and yield effective mixing. Similar to flow twisting, flow recirculation also results in stretching and folding of fluid in the ridged channel, and ought to have a potential to improve fluid mixing. In the remaining of this section, a mixing scheme utilizing flow recirculation is discussed in details. Its already known that the additi on of an electric field to the Poiseuille flow in a ridged channel leads to the occurrence of recirculation in the flow. To induce recirculation of proper intensity, the pair of forces in the fluid, namely electrokinetic force and the pressure force has to satisfy the requirement obtained in previous sect ion. A continuous applic ation of the electric field, however, will result in dead volume in the recirculation region in the flow, which doesnt help in fluid mixing. Hence a discrete signal, for example a s quare wave (Figure 5-10), should be applied for fluid mixing. As a result, an unsteady EOF is induced in the ridged channel. PAGE 109 109 5.3.1 Formulation of Unsteady EOF Formulations of the equations of the motion of fluid flow in pulsed recirculation mixer is similar to that provided in Section 4.2, excep t the addition of the temporal term due to the application of a periodic electric field. The formulas include continuity equation, momentum equation and Poisson equation. After the appli cation of the effective slip boundary condition and the normalization by 0 0 0xxL VVL tt ppP The formulas become **0V (5-1) ***2***2* *ReStRe4V VVKpV t (5-2) *20 (5-3) In the formulas, , x Vtp are the position vector, velocity vector, time, pressure, and electric potential, and they are non-dimensionalized using 00, PL which are the characteristic applied pressure, the characteristic length scale of the ridged channel (the distance between the periodic ridge), the electroosmotic mobility at the boundary (defined in Equation 121), the characteristic applied electric potential, and the characteristic time scale (the period of the applied pulsed electric field), respectively. Th e Laplacian and the gradient operators are also normalized using L. K is the same dimensionless number defined in Equation 4-32, Re and St are the Reynolds and Strouhal numbers respectively, and defined as 0Re (5-4) PAGE 110 110 2 0StL (5-5) As the Reynolds number is less than the order of unity in a typical EO F; the second term in the momentum equation can be dropped off. Howe ver, the Strouhal number, as the ratio of time scale of EOF to the period of the applied electric field can be large, making the temporal term in the momentum equation dominant. 5.3.2 Pulsed Recirculation The application of a constant pressure and su ch a pulsed electric field results in a time periodic flow in the ridged ch annel. Each period consists of two phases: recirculation phase when the electric field is on, and feeding phase when the electric field is off. In the recirculation phase, recirculation occurs in th e flow and the fluids in the ridged channel are homogenized due to the actuation; the mixer is active. While in the second phase, the flow restores to laminar and thus the mixer is inactive. During the feeding phase, the mixed fluids are flushed out of the ridged channel, and unmixed flui ds are fed into the mixer. The mixing is related to the manner that electri c field is applied, namely the magnitude of electric field, the oscillation frequency, the wa ve form and the duty cycle. The optimization of mixer is not performed in this work, and only guidelines are discussed here. In general the following operation conditions ar e desired in order to obtain an optimal mixing. Strong recirculation intensity. The stronger the recircula tion, the more effective the mixer is. Based on the numerical study of flow recirculation in the ridged channel, the intensity of recirculation depends on the ra tio of the external forces impos ed on the fluid. The amplitude of the electric signal should be adjusted such that in the r ecirculation phase, the resulting dimensionless parameter, K, is in the range where significant flow recirculation is obtained. Sufficient recirculation time. The length of the recircul ation phase ought to be long enough to ensure a fully development of the flow recirculation in the ridged channel and a PAGE 111 111 subsequent fully mixing by the recirculation. The time scale for the development of the flow recirculation is approximated by 2L To meet the criteria, the time period must satisfy 2L or 1 R eSt Hence the temporal term can be removed from the momentum equation in Equation 5-2. Physically, this implies the transition from one pha se to another is so quick that the flow is treated as a quasi-static flow, and the time only enters as a parameter to determine the phase. No overfeeding. The amount of fluid pumped in f eeding phase has to be carefully controlled that there is no overfed of fluid into the mixer. In the feeding phase of each cycle, unmixed fluids are fed into the mixer and an equal amount of mixed fl uid are pushed out of mixer during the same period of time. Its desire d to have the traveling distance of the incoming fluid in the feeding phase less than the length of the mixer. Given the hydraulic diameter of the ridged channel, D, and the average pressure gradient, 0PL, the average velocity in the channel is approximated by 2 032PDL Hence the time period has to satisfy 232LlPD, where l is streamwise length of the ridged ch annel where recirculation takes place. 5.4 Simulation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer Pulsed recirculation mixer utilizing recircul ation in ridged cha nnel is investigated numerically in this section. The micro mixer, called pulsed recirculation mixer, consists of a segment of ridged channel as shown in Figure 2-10. CFD simulations is carried out to demonstrate the mixing mechanism by flow r ecirculation and to evaluate its mixing performance. A mixer model, containing 10 cons ecutive ridge structures, is created using CFDMICROMESH (Figure 5-11). Th e ridges have same geometry as the one used in the investigation of flow recirculat ion. The ridged channel has spa tial period of 108 micron, and the PAGE 112 112 hydraulic diameter is 56 micron. A time varyi ng electric field is impos ed by applying a square wave electric potential at the outlet of the mixer and keeping the two inlets grounded. The mixing process of two segr egated streams is simulated. The incoming streams, deionized water and a 0.1 mM Rhodamine-B soluti on are pumped by an average pressure drop of 375 Pa/cm. The diffusion coefficien t of Rhodamine-B is set as 3.6x10-10 m2/s. An electric field of mean strength of 272 V/cm is a pplied. Based on the definition of K in Equation 4-32 the corresponding parameter K is 9.1, roughly in the range wh ere significant flow recirculation would be obtained. The electric field is alternating at the freq uency of 1 Hz, and the duty cycle is 50%. Therefore in each cycle the duration fo r recirculation and feed ing phases are 0.5 second each. The fluid density is set as 997 kg/m3, and the fluid kinetic viscosity is 1x10-6 m2/s in the simulation. With the simulation configuration, the criteria for optimal mixing in Section 5.2 are all satisfied. The initial state of simulation is set to be a stea dy flow where zero electric field is applied. At zero second, the pulsed signal is applied. The fluid flow in the PRM is calculated every 0.1 second by the CFD software, and the simulati on stops at 6 seconds, the end of the 6th period. Simulation shows that flow reci rculation occurs in the PRM at a frequency of 1 Hz, and the unsteady flow quickly settles at an oscillating pattern as the tr ansient effect decays and becomes negligible. Figure 5-12 shows the typical e volution of the distribution of Rhodamine-B at a cross section over one period. The cro ss section is located at ~1 mm after the merging of two streams, between the 4th and 5th ridge structures (section II in Figur e 5-11). Contour lines of RhodamineB concentration are calculated and plotted at the cross section view s for each frame. Also shown in Figure 5-12l is the contour lines in a flow at the cross section of a regular channel (without PAGE 113 113 ridge structures). As expected, the co ntour lines are vertical in Figure 5-12l, indicating no flow stretching or folding, and hence the Rhodamine-B concentration has a large variation. While in ridged channel, the bending and rotating of the contour lines are clearl y seen, implying twisting and recirculation inside the flow Compared to the variance at the same location, PRM yields more homogenized solution, as less number of c ontour lines is present at the cross sectional views. As the flow in the PRM settles at a stable pattern (Figure 5-13 A), the time-averaged variance of Rhodamine-B concentration over one period is used in evaluating the mixing effectiveness of the PRM. The time-averaged con centration variation is cal culated and plotted as a function of travel distance in the mixer (F igure 5-13B). Comparing the time-averaged variation in the PRM with the variation in a pressu re driven flow in the same ridged channel, one may find the Rhodamine-B is evidently better mi xed by the PRM due to the periodic occurrence of the recirculation. Similar to the amplification of mixing defined in the study of fluid mixing in ridged channel, the amplification of mixing in PRM is defined as amplification of mixing = regPRM where P RM is the variation of concentra tion at the exit of the PRM and reg is the variation at the exit of segment of regular channel of same length. Based on the simulation results, the PRM (with K=9.1) delivers a roughly 10-fold mixi ng amplification to the flow at Pe=412. While a segment of ridged channel of same length yields an amplification of mi xing about 4. Clearly PRM improved fluid mixing better due to the pe riodic occurrence of recirculation. With optimized parameter settings, better mixi ng performance is possible from the PRM. PAGE 114 114 5.5 Experiment Validation of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer 5.5.1 Experiment Setup A prototype PRM is connected to syringe pumps and placed on an invert microscope. A 0.1 mM Rhodamine-B solution and deionized water are pumped into the mixe r at the same flow rate. A UV lamp is equipped to the microscope to illuminate the fluid flow. A high speed CCD camera (Hamamatsu, Japan) is used to acquire the fluorescent emission from the Rhodamine-B in the fluid. The intensity of fluorescence em ission is proportional to the concentration of Rhodamine-B in the mixer. Hence one may eval uate the distribution of Rhodamine-B in the fluid in the mixer by examining the fluorescent images. The pulse signal in the mixer is generate d by an in-house LabView program and a highvoltage amplifier. The high-voltage is imposed to the fluid in the mixer via two electric wires that are glued to the printe d carbonate ink electrodes. The whole experiment setup, including the mi croscope and the fluid flow systems, are enclosed in a house-made opaque box, so that mi nimal environment light is present during image acquisition. The experiment set up is illustrated in Figure 5-14. 5.5.2 Experiment Results and Analysis As predicted by the CFD simulation, the mi xing performance of a pulsed recirculation mixer is significantly dependent on the applied elect ric field, namely, its frequency, duty cycle, and amplitude. Among the three operation parame ters, the electric field amplitude plays the most critical role in determining th e performance, and it is related to K, a dimensionless parameter defined as the ratio of th e electric force to the pressure fo rce on the fluid in the mixer. In this section, mixi ng experiments are conducted to veri fy the mixing performance by the pulsed recirculation mixer. PAGE 115 115 Figure 5-15a shows the PRM th at is used in the experi ment. 0.1 mM Rhodamine-B solution and deionized water are pum ped into the mixer at a preset flow rate of 13 nL/s. An electric field is applied to the portion of mixer between the two carbonate electrodes. The average electric field strength is 1000 V/cm in the ridged channel, the duty cycle is 50%, and the frequency is 5 Hz. The resulting K is about 20. Figure 5-15b shows the top view of fluid flow in the ridged channel without application of the elec tric field, while Figure 5-15c shows the top view of the same mixer with the application of th e pulsed electric field. The fluorescent images are taken at the end of recirculation phase. Co mparing the two sets of top views, one may find a significant improvement on fluid mixing with the presence of flow recirculation in the ridged channel area. Figure 5-16 shows the temporal evolution of R hodamine-B distribution in the ridged channel in a period. The mixer is opera ted with the following operation parameters: K=20, 50% duty cycle and 1 Hz oscillation frequency. Cons ecutive fluorescent images are taken at the fifth ridge structure and the time lapse between two adjacent acquisitions is 0.2 second. The temporal variation of the Rhodamine-B conc entration distribution in the mixe r validates that recirculation is the mixing mechanism in the PRM. In each cycle the fluid is more mixed during the recirculation phase as the fluid appears more uniform; while its less mixed during the feeding phase as unmixed fluid is driven into the mixer. For compar ison purpose, the steady view of same mixer without the a pplication of electric field is presen ted in Figure 5-16f. Comparing the uniformity of the fluid, it is ev idential that the addition of a pu lsed flow recirculation helps to enhance the fluid mixing in the ridged channel. Intensity histogram profile is computed from the sequential images in Figure 5-16. To generate a histogram profile, intensities from an enclosed region in the fluorescent images of the PAGE 116 116 ridged channel are counted. The region contains a total of 21838 pixels, as indicated in Figure 516f. Figure 5-17 shows the temporal evolution of intensity histogram profile in the ridge channel in one cycle. One may observe the same trend th at has been recognized in Figure 5-16. Without the presence of the recirculat ion, the histogram profiles posse ss two large separated peaks, representing the two distinct streams in the flow During the recirculation phase when the mixer is active, the two peaks move toward each other while their he ights grow higher, implying the two streams are better mixed. In the feeding pha se when the mixer is inactive, the two peaks move back further apart a nd the heights go down, implying less mixing in the fluid. The effect of K on the mixing performance of PRM is illustrated by Figure 5-18. By fixing the pressure drop and varying the amplitude of the pulsed electric field, the K varies from 60 to 12. As expected, the closer K approximates to the optimal value (K=4.5) that determined from the CFD simulation, the stronger th e flow recirculation occurs in the ridged channel, and the better the mixing performance is. This observation qualitatively agrees with the CFD simulation results of the pulsed recircula tion mixer reported previously. 5.6 Summary Flow recirculation is observed in ridged channels. Its induc ed when an electric field of opposite direction to the pressure drop is impos ed to the flow. Commercial CFD simulation software is used to characterize recirculation with respect to the external forces. Its found that recirculation becomes significant only when the external forces (the pressure forces and the electrokinetic force) are comparable. With curre nt ridged channel conf iguration, significant recirculation is induced in ridged channels when K is in the range from 1.8 to 20, and strongest recirculation occurs when K approximates 4.5. A micromixer that utilizes recirculation to improve fluid mixing is presented. Since a pulsed electric field is require d during operation, the novel mi xer is referred as pulsed PAGE 117 117 recirculation mixer. CFD simulation of the PRM shows that it yields excel lent mixing result due to the periodic occurrenc e of recirculation. For example, it delivers a roughly 10-fold mixing amplification to flows at Pe = 412, when K = 9.1. The experiment of mixing Rhodamine-B solu tion with DI water in a prototype PRM validates the superior performance of the PR M. Further experiments suggests the mixing performance of PRM correlates with the intensity of recirculation, as better mixing is achieved by PRM when K approaches 4.5. The mixing of the PRM is rela ted to the electric field strength, the frequency, the duty cycle, even the ridged channel geometries. Its noted that the mixing resu lts presented here are not from the mixer at an optimized conditions, and better mixing performance can be achieved if an optimal working condition is applied to the PRM. PAGE 118 118 Table 5-1. Summary of boundary conditions for CFD simulation. Case No. P (Pa) V (Volt) K Flow rate (nL/s) Related figures 1 75 0 -9.97 Figure 5-7a 2 100 20 30.9 -10.07 Figure 5-8a 3 90 20 27.8 -8.89 4 80 20 24.7 -7.71 5 70 20 21.6 -6.53 Figure 5-8b 6 60 20 18.5 -5.35 7 50 20 15.4 -4.18 8 40 20 12.3 -3.00 Figure 5-8c 9 30 20 9.3 -1.8 10 25 20 7.7 -1.23 11 20 20 6.2 -0.64 Figure 5-8d 12* 15 20 4.6 -0.05 Figure 5-8e 13 10 20 3.1 0.53 Figure 5-8f 14 5 20 1.5 1.11 15 6 20 1.9 1.00 Figure 5-8g 16 7 20 2.2 0.88 17 8 20 2.5 0.77 18 0 20 0 1.69 Figure 5-7b PAGE 119 119 Figure 5-1. Microscopic image of microbead traces in a flow in ridged channels. The beads circulating around the ridges are the eviden ce of flow recircul ation in ridged channels. The ridged channel has dept h of 40 micron and width of 110 micron. Figure 5-2. Plot of st reamline and velocity profile of flow s in the wavy channel calculated by CFD-ACE+ simulation and the analytical so lution. Flow recirc ulation is observed from (a) the simulated streamline by CFD-ACE+ (a) and from (c) the streamline plot by the analytical solution developed in Chapter 4. Back flow is also observed in the velocity profiles of flow by CFD-ACE+ simula tion (c) and the analytical solution (d). The two sets of results agree very well. The wavy channel has wavelength of 76.4 m, wave amplitude of 5.5 m, and width of 29 m. External pressure and electric field are applied at the boundary such that K=2. PAGE 120 120 R2 = 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 00.20.40.60.81 normalized electric potential values from CFD-ACEelectric potential values from analytical solution R2 = 1 -0.15 -0.1 -0.05 0 0.05 -0.15-0.1-0.0500.05 normalized stream function values from CFD-ACEstream function values from analytical solution R2 = 1 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 00.20.40.60.81 normalized electric potential values from CFD-ACEelectric potential values from analytical solution R2 = 1 -0.15 -0.1 -0.05 0 0.05 -0.15-0.1-0.0500.05 normalized stream function values from CFD-ACEstream function values from analytical solution Figure 5-3. Comparison of elect ric potential and stream functi on data in flows in the wavy channel obtained by CFD-ACE+ simula tion and the analytical solution. (a) (b)(c) (a) (b)(c) Figure 5-4. Simulation model used for simulating flows in ridged ch annel. Layout of mask (a), a series of parallelograms, is used in ge nerating simulation models (b). The model contains 11 ridge stru ctures resulting from 40-micron isotropic etching process. The length of mixer is 1200 micron, and the hydrau lic diameter is 56 micron. The inset shows the detailed view of mesh structur es in the model. A total of 141 points, labeled by cross signs, are defined around ridge structures in the model (c) and serves as the origins of streaklines in Figures 5-7 and 5-8. PAGE 121 121 (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (a) (b) (d) (c) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (a) (b) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (a) (b) (d) (d) (c) (c) Figure 5-5. Simulation of fl uid mixing in a ridged channel by CFD-ACE+. Two streams, solution of 0.1 mM specimen and water, are introduced into the ridged channel (a) at a preset flow rate. The cross sectiona l views with contour lines for specimen concentration in the ridged channel are s hown in (c). The locations of the cross sections (top to bottom) are labeled in (a) as (i) to (iv). In this case, the flow rate is set at 5 nL/s. The Peclet number of the fl ow is 450, and the Reynolds number is 0.15. Also shown is a segment of regular cha nnel (b) of same length and same etching depth but with no ridge struct ures. With same incoming streams, the cross sectional views of the regular channel ar e displayed in (d). Blue st ream is water and red stream is specimen solution. The increment of the contour levels is 5 nM. PAGE 122 122 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 travel distance (m)/0(a) (b) (e) (c) (d) (f) (g) (h) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ln(Pe)amplification of mixing RCM SHM (A)(B) 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 travel distance (m)/0(a) (b) (e) (c) (d) (f) (g) (h) 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 travel distance (m)/0(a) (b) (e) (c) (d) (f) (g) (h) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ln(Pe)amplification of mixing RCM SHM (A)(B) Figure 5-6. Simulated mixing performance of the PRM. (A ) Plot of specimen concentration variation at different cross sections of ridged channel mixer. 0 =0.05 mM, is the variance at the entrance of the channels. The continuous lines (a-d) represent the mixing coefficient in the ridged channel; while the dashed lines (e-h) are for the segment of regular channel. Data points marked as (a and e) are measured in flow with flow rate of 1.25 nL/s. As a resu lt, the flow has Reynolds number of 0.04 and Peclet number of 113. Data with mark o, and x are fr om flows of Pe=450 (b and f), Pe=1800 (c and g), and Pe=7200 (d a nd h), respectively. (B) Plot of mixing amplification by the ridged cha nnel as a function of ln(Pe). (a) (b) (a) (b) Figure 5-7. Top views of st reaklines of massless particle s convected by flows in ridged channels. The Poiseuille flow (a) and el ectroosmotic flow (b) in ridged channels simulated by CFD-ACE+ Also presented are the velocity profiles in the flow. A 0.2 second duration is used in generating streaklin es in pressure driven flow to ensure they fit in the figure. PAGE 123 123 (a) (f) (e) (d) (c) (b) (g) (a) (f) (e) (d) (c) (b) (g) Figure 5-8. Streaklines of massless particles convected by flow in ridged channe ls at different K. The K in each case is (a) 30.9, (b) 21.6, (c) 12.3, (d) 6.2, (e) 4.6, (f) 3.1, and (g) 1.9, respectively. PAGE 124 124 Figure 5-9. Flow patterns in a ridged channel made on plastic substrates. The ridged channel has a periodic length of 108. 7 microns, width of 110 mi crons, depth of 40 microns, and ridge heights of 12 microns. The pressu re remains constant in the experiment, while the electric field varies. Th e corresponding dimensionless parameter K in each case is (a) 3.16, (b) 3.48, (c) 3.87, (d) 4.35, (e) 5.81, (f) 6.97, (g) 11.6, (h) 17.4, and (i) 34.8. 00.5 1 1.52 00.5 1 1.52 Figure 5-10. Pulsed electric si gnal applied in PRM for production of periodic recirculation. The example signal has period of T and duty cycle of 50%. PAGE 125 125 I II III IV I II III IV Figure 5-11. Simulation model for pulse recircula tion mixer. The mixer consists of two inlets, one outlet and ten ridge structures. Labels I, II, III and IV, indicate the cross sections behind the 1st, 4th, 7th, and 10th ridge structures, respectively. PAGE 126 126 Figure 5-12. Temporal variation of Rhodamine-B distri bution at a cross sec tion of the periodic recirculation mixer over one period. (a-j ) are Rhodamine-B di stribution at cross section (II in Figure 5-11) at the interval of 0.1 s econd. Also shown are the Rhodamine-B distribution when a constant electric field ap plied (k) and the Rhodamine-B distribution at cross section of a regular channel without any ridge structures (l). 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 10-8 travel distance in channel (m)Species concentration variation, (M) ridged channel pulsed recirculation regular channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 10-8 time (sec)Species concentration variation, (M) section I section II section III section IV (A)(B) 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 10-8 travel distance in channel (m)Species concentration variation, (M) ridged channel pulsed recirculation regular channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 x 10-8 time (sec)Species concentration variation, (M) section I section II section III section IV (A)(B) Figure 5-13. Evolution of the R hodamine-B concentration variation in the fluid in a PRM. (A) The evolution of Rhodamine-B concentration variation at cross sections of pulsed recirculation mixer (I, II, III, and IV in Figure 5-11). The time-averaged variation during one cycle is plotted against traveling distance in (B). Also plotted in (B) are the Rhodamine-B concentration variations in the same ri dged channel but without the application of electric field, as well as the variations in a segment of regular channel. PAGE 127 127 Figure 5-14. Experiment setup for the fluid mixing of Rhodamine -B solution and DI water in a prototype PRM. The two incoming fluids are pumped into PRM by two sets of syringe pumps that are connected to the inlets. External electric field is imposed via the two metal wire glued on the mixer. A detailed view of PRM is shown in the inset. PAGE 128 128 Figure 5-15. Comparison between the flow in the inactive mixer and the flow in the active mixer. (a) A top view of the ridged channe l portion between the two electrodes. (b) Without the application of electric field, the top views (i, ii, iii) of fluid flows in the channel, at 1st, 5th and 9th ridge structures. The incoming streams are 0.1mM RB solution and DI water, both are pumped at flow rate of 13 nL/s. (c) With the application of a pulsed electric field, the top views (iv, v, vi) of fluid flows in the channel, at the same locations. The flow rate is set at 13 nL/s, and the average electric field is about 1000 V/cm, the oscillation frequency is 5 Hz, and the duty cycle is 50%. The resulting K is about 20. PAGE 129 129 Figure 5-16. Temporal variation of fluid mixing in PRM during one cycle. The pulsed electric field has frequency of 1 Hz and duty cy cle of 50%. The operation parameter K used in this mixing test is 20. Images are ta ken at the first ridge structure at 0.2 second interval. Without the application of the pulsed electric field, the flui d appears steady and the top view is shown in (f). The yello w line encloses area that used to generate the intensity histogram profile. 1000 1500 2000 2500 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0 500 1,000 1,500 Time CountPixel Value feeding phase recirculation phase Figure 5-17. Temporal evolution of intensity histogram profile in th e ridge channel in one cycle. The pulsed electric field has frequency of 1 Hz and duty cycle of 50%. The operation parameter K used in this mixing example is 20. PAGE 130 130 Figure 5-18. Effect of parameter K on mixing performance of pul sed recirculation mixer. Images are taken at the 5th ridge. The electric field is 0, 666, 1000, and 1333 V/cm, respectively; and the operation parameter K is (a) inf, (b) 30, (c) 20, and (d) 15. The ratio of standard deviation of intensity to mean is 0.34, 0.32, 0.19 and 0.12, respectively. PAGE 131 131 CHAPTER 6 CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE DIRECTIONS 6.1 Conclusions The main objective in this research work is to design an effective and efficient microfluidic mixer for lab-on-chip devices. To achieve th is, a novel structure, called micro ridges is developed via judicious de sign in isotropic etching. Flow twisting is observed as fluid is pumped through ridged channels. Deconvolution microscopy is explored and used in validating the flow twisting and evaluation of fluid mixing by the twisting effect. Flow recirculation is observed in a pressure fluid flow in microchannels of varying cross section area, when an electric field of opposite di rection is imposed. Its first observed in the ridged channel and th en studied in a wavy channel for its si mple channel geometry. An analytic solution to flow in a wavy channel is devel oped in this research using complex function formulation and boundary integral formulation. The onset conditions for recirculation in a wavy channel are found dependent on one dimensionless parameter related to external forces and two dimensionless parameters related to the channel geometry. The theoretical prediction agrees well with experimental observation of a seed ed flow in wavy channels created on PDMS substrate. Following the study of recirculati on in the 2D wavy channel, r ecirculation in the 3D ridged channels is studied, both theore tically and experimentally. The conclusion drawn from the 2D geometries is used as guidelines in investig ating recirculation in the more complex 3D counterpart. A commerci al computational fluid dynamic pack age, CFD-ACE+, is used to model the fluid flow in the ridged channel. Similar tren ds are observed in the onset and size of the flow recirculation in the ridged channels. PAGE 132 132 A microfluidic mixer, called pulsed recircul ation mixer, is designed and fabricated on plastic substrates. Faster and effective mixing is achieved by the prototype PRM as predicted by the numerical simulation. The mixing results, as a result of the flow reci rculation, significantly depend on a dimensionless parameter related to th e external forces. Fl uid mixing experiments are conducted on a prototype PRM, and the results confirm the numer ical predictions. The major objective of the research is achie ved: pulsed recirculation mixer is an effective and efficient mixer for microfluidic systems. To recapitulate the research work on the pulse d recirculation mixer design, a road map is presented in Figure 6.1 to illustrate the work flow. The research work starts from the observation of recirculation in ridged channel (Figure 6.1a). By simplifying such recirculation to flow in the wavy channel (Figure 6.1b and 6.1c), an analytical solution is developed so that a parametric study on the recirculation is possi ble (Figure 6.1d). The system atic investigation of flow recirculation in the wavy channel helps study th e flow recirculation in the ridged channel both numerically and experimentally (Figure 6.1e). A full cycle of research work has been accomplished, and the results are eventually applie d in design and optimization of a microfluidic mixer based on flow recirc ulation (Figure 6.1f). 6.2 Future Directions 6.2.1 Deconvolution Algorithm As pointed in Chapter 3, commercial deconvol ution software is used in deconvolution microscopy, and the results are sometimes imperfect. To improve the quality of reconstructed image, new deconvolution algorithm can be devel oped for specific appli cation of visualizing microfluidic flows. The new algorithm s hould be based on the blind MLE deconvolution algorithm, since it yields the best results among all tested deconvolution algorithms. Additional constraints should be applied to penalize any non-zero value at pixels outsid e the channel PAGE 133 133 geometry in the iteration process. Fast and be tter reconstruction is expected from deconvolution microscopy coupled with this new deconvolution algorithm. 6.2.2 Optical Sectioning for Periodic Flow The deconvolution microscopy t echnique developed in Chapter 2 is limited to visualizing steady flows in microchannels. This is due to the difficulty in optical sectioning of unsteady fluid flow. Optical s ectioning requires adjust of optical focal plane and subsequent image acquisition in steps, therefore the operation ta kes considerable length of time. Steady flow doesnt change during the process of optical sectioning, and the images taken at each step can be assumed of flow of same instan t. However for unsteady flow, this assumption becomes invalid. One of future work is to improve it for visualizing a periodic, as it is desired in evaluating mixing efficiency by pulsed recirculation mixer in which fluid flow is time-periodic. The preliminary experiments in this dissertation wo rk only confirm that a PRM delivers better mixing results than a ridged channel mixe r. This is proved by the expe rimental observation from the top view of the fluid flow in the mixer. However, th is top view only represents the mixing of fluid at the focal plane. To obtain an adequate perfor mance of fluid mixing by PRM, one needs to have a cross sectional view of the fluid flow in the ch annel. Deconvolution microscopy is not suitable to evaluate the mixing performance of a PRM, for its flow is unsteady. However, for periodic flow, optical sectioning can be achie ved by phase locking the image acquisition with the periodi city of the flow, so that the acqui red images are from the periodic flow at different instant but of same phase in a period. Henc e the images can be regarded from same instant. As of visualizing flow in th e PRM, it can be achieved by synchronizing the CCD camera exposure and the applicati on of electric field. In pr actice, one can use a function generator to output two waveforms of same frequency but with a fixed phase shift. One signal PAGE 134 134 will be used to control a relay for the pulsed el ectric field in the mixer, and the other will be connected to a CCD camera for triggering the ex posure at each step of optical sectioning. Another issue in deconvolution microscopy for unsteady flow is the insufficient exposure in image acquisition. For visualizing steady flow the exposure time of CCD camera can be set long enough so that the collected si gnal is stronger than the thermal noise. However for periodic flow of short period, shorter exposure is requ ired and the resulting signal may be overshadowed by the electric noises in the CCD camera. Ther efore multiple exposures may be taken at each step of the optical sectioning, and the average, w ith better signal to noise ratio, can be used in deconvolution. 6.2.3 Optimization of Pulsed Recirculation Mixer Once an accurate evaluation of fluid mixing in PRM becomes possible, the complete experimental characterization of PRM can be perf ormed. In the CFD simulation of PRM, there are three parameters that will affect the performance of the mixer. They are K, the ratio of the external forces, the oscillation frequency of the repulsed electric field, a nd its duty cycle. In current work, only K is studied, as its the major factor in determining the intensity of flow recirculation in ridged channel. In the future work, a parame tric study may be carried out to characterize the mixer, and search for the optimal working condition. 6.2.4 Analytical Solution of EOF in Irregular Channel Another possible direction is to further develop the analytical method used in solving EOF in wavy channel and apply it in so lving EOF in other 2D periodic geometries as shown in Figure 6-2. Demonstrated by the micro particles seed ed in the fluid, the flows in these periodic channels also have recirculation inside the channel, but the shape of recirculation region appears different from the one in wavy channel. Furt her research work can start from the current PAGE 135 135 solution to EOF in wavy channel and develop a general analytical method to solve flow in channels of any periodic geometry. As pointed previously, the current method is capable of solving a Stokes flow, which is governed by a linear ordinary differential e quation and prescribed by boundary conditions defined on sinusoidal walls. And it is well known that any periodic geometry can be composed by multiple sinusoidal according to Fourier theorem. Hence the solution to the flow in channel of periodic shape could be obtained by solv ing flow with each sinusoidal boundary and superposing all the indi vidual solution together. PAGE 136 136 Figure 6-1. Roadmap of research work on the development of th e pulsed recirculation mixer. Flow recirculation is observe d (a) and investigated in th e wavy channel (b-d) and in the ridged channel (e), before applied in the design and optimization of the pulsed recirculation mixer (f). PAGE 137 137 Figure 6-2. Microscopic images of fluid flow in periodic channels of different profiles (sinusoidal, square-wavy, and triangle-wave). The fluid is seeded with microbead of 0.75 micron in diameter. Pathlines of beads is obtained by overlapping 60 consecutive images. EOF is in the opposite direction of the pressure gradient. The recirculation flow regions are indicated by denser bead population (more dark spots). PAGE 138 138 APPENDIX A POINT SPREAD FUNCTION Point Spread Function (PSF) is a spatial functio n of light intensity de scribing the output of the imaging system (the microscope) for an i nput point source. As the most fundamental characteristic of an imaging system, PSF is vi ewed as the impulse re sponse function of a microscope in spatial domain.106 Equation Chapter 1 Section 1 For a shift-invariant, idea lly corrected and aberrant free microscope, the PSF, axisymmetric along the optical axis and symmet ric about conjugate imag e plane, is given by,106 2 1 2 0 0(,,)exp 2i hxyzCJd (A-1) In Equation A-1, (,,) x yz are coordinates from the conjugate point; 0J is the zeroth-order Bessel function of the first kind; and are dimensionless numbers defined as 22 x y a 22 a z f fz and 222 a x y f where a is the radius of objective aperture, f is the focal length and is the wavelength of emission light; and C is a constant. The expression given above is only one approxima tion for the three dimensional point spread function. Many alternative forms of 3D PSF have been re ported based on scalar diffraction theory.9-11, 61 The plot of PSF from Equation A-1 is a 3D diffraction pattern, centered on the conjugate image of the point source located in th e image plane, as shown in Figure A-1. On the image plane where z = 0, the PSF is simplified to 2 1 0 0(,) hxyCJd which represents a series of concentric spheres k nown as airy disk (Figure A-2). The radius of airy disk (distance between the central maximum and the first minimum) is related to the numerical aperture ( NA ) of the objective lens, 0.61lateralr NA (A-2) In the axial direction, the intensity profile (Figure A-3) is similar to that on lateral direction, and the distance between the maximum intensity of the cen tral bright region to the first point of minimum intensity al ong optical axis is given by 22axialn r NA (A-3) PAGE 139 139 Figure A-1. Plot of point spread function in an octant of 3D space. Figure A-2. Airy disk, pl ot of PFS at the plane of z = 0. PAGE 140 140 Figure A-3. Plot of PSF on a 2D plane along z axis. PAGE 141 141 APPENDIX B DECONVOLUTION ALGORITHMS* Mathematically, the general relationship between image i(x, y, z) object o(x, y, z) and point spread function h(x, y, z) is expressed as a spatia l convolution, i.e. a triple integration over space, (,,)(,,)(,,)(,,) ixyzhxyzodddnxyz, (B-1) where ,, nxyz is additive random noise. By denoting convolution operation as the above equation is abbreviated as ihon This relationship indicates that the images taken from the microscope deviate from their real counterpa rts, commonly referred to as optical blur. Deconvolution is the mathematical operation to invert the convoluti on process, so that images are reconstructed by reducing the noise and correcting for the optical blur. Once the images are reconstructed, they are stacked to form a 3D data set, with each component representing the fluorescence intensity at the co rresponding point in object space. A variety of deconvolution algorithms has been devel oped and they are summarized here. B.1 Inverse Filter An inverse filter algorithm such as a Wiener filter65 transforms the stack of raw images i(x, y, z) in the spatial domain into I(u, v, w) in the Fourier domain. Sin ce a convolution in the spatial domain is equivalent to a point-by-point multiplication in the Fourier domain, i.e., [(,,)(,,)][(,,)][(,,)] FFThxyzoxyzFFThxyzFFToxyz (B-2) the image formation in Fourier domain is expressed as (,,)(,,)(,,)(,,) I uvwHuvwOuvwNuvw (B-3) where I(u, v, w) O(u, v, w) H(u, v, w) and N (u, v, w) are the respectiv e counterparts of i o h and n in the Fourier domain. When noise is negligible compared to the coherent signal, the object is easily obtained by dividing by H on both sides of Equation B-3, (,,) (,,) (,,) I uvw Ouvw Huvw (B-4) where ^ indicates an estimation. In cases when noise cannot be neglec ted, a Wiener inverse filter is used to minimize degradation from noise Assuming the ratio of the power spectrum of the noise to the object is b the estimate of the object becomes 2(,,) (,,)(,,) (,,) Huvw OuvwIuvw Huvwb (B-5) where indicates the complex conjugate. Once the reconstructed object is found in Fourier domain, it may be applied the inverse Fourier tr ansform, and the object is obtained in spatial domain as, (,,)[(,,)] oxyzIFFTOuvw (B-6) B.2 Constrained Iterative Deconvolution Many popular deconvolution algorithms, such as the Jansson Van-Cittert algorithm,66 the Gold algorithm,67 and the Richardson Lucy (also known as Maximum Likelihood Estimation or Part of this chapter has been published in Deconvolution Microscopy fo r Flow Visualization in Microchannels, Analytical Chemestry 2007, 79(6): p. 2576-2582. PAGE 142 142 MLE) algorithm68, 69 are classified as constrained iterative algorithms. The object estimation is achieved in a iterative process by imposing vari ous constraints. The positive constraint, a primary and primitive one, ensures the estimate of the object, (x, y, z), is always positive. In each iteration, a new estimate of object k+1(u, v, w) is calculated using (,,) I uvw (,,) Huvw, and (,,) kOuvw from the last iteration. When the object converges or other criteria reach a preset threshold, such as the maximum number of itera tions is reached, the iteration process stops, and the current (u, v, w) is inverse Fourier transformed to the spatial domain. In practice, (u, v, w) from the inverse filter deconvolution algorithm is often used as an approximation in the first iteration. The Jansson Van-Cittert, Gold, and MLE algorithms are different in the new object that are generated in each iterati on; and they are expressed as (1)()()() (,,)(,,)(,,)(,,)(,,)kkkkOuvwKOuvwWIuvwHuvwOuvw (B-7) (1)() ()()(,,) (,,)(,,) (,,)(,,)kk kkIuvw OuvwKOuvw HuvwOuvw (B-8) and, (1)() () () ()(,,) (,,)(,,)(,,) (,,)(,,)kk k k kixyz oxyzKoxyzhxyz hxyzoxyz (B-9) Here K is a normalized constant, and W is a weight function. In all of these algorithms, the PSF (()kH or ()kh) remains the same in each iteration. B.3 Blind Deconvolution Blind deconvolution algorithms70 use the same principle as constrained iteration algorithms, except that they also update the PSF in each iteration. This family of algorithms excels when the PSF is unknown or is perhaps not accurately measured. In each iteration Equations B-10, B-11, and B-12 below are pair ed with Equations B-7, B-8, and B-9, respectively, to compute the PSF and the object. In the first iteration, th e initial guess of the object is usually set as the acquired image, and th e initial guess of the PSF is simply set as the one from a theoreti cal model or unity. (1)()()() (,,)(,,)(,,)(,,)(,,)kkkkHuvwKHuvwWIuvwHuvwOuvw (B-10) (1)() ()()(,,) (,,)(,,) (,,)(,,)kk kkIuvw HuvwKHuvw HuvwOuvw (B-11) (1)()() ()()(,,) (,,)(,,)(,,) (,,)(,,)kkk kkixyz hxyzKhxyzoxyz hxyzoxyz (B-12) PAGE 143 143 APPENDIX C SOLUTION TO ELECTRIC POTENT IAL AND STREAM FUNCTION* This appendix describes the details in solving the periodic functions ()Gx, ()Gx, () R x, () R x, ()Qx, and ()Qx that are used for calculating ()G () R and () Q. The symmetry of the channel geometry ensures that for Stokes flow ()() x x so that ()() [()] 2 x x x and ()() [()] 2 x x x i C.1 Electric Potential Solution Equation 4-22 and Equation 4-23 in Chapter 4 can be reduced to 0mmmgg (C-1) and ,1,14mmmmmgg (C-2) Similarly, Equation 4-26 becomes ,exp()0nmmn mnhggE (C-3) where ,0,1,1 0 2 () 0mmm mn nmn E m Inn n is Kronecker delta, and()n I z is the nth order modified Bessel function of first kind, 1 exp(cos)cos 2n I zznd Equations C-1, C2, and C-3 form a complete set for solving coefficients mg and mg \{0} m Since the electric field is E as a result, the tangential electric field strength along the walls (Equation 4-27 and Equatio n 4-28) can be evaluated using: 1 ()2exp() 2tm mExmgimx (C-4) and 221 exp() 2 () 1sin()mm m tmggimx Ex x (C-5) C.2 Stream Function Solution For the stream function, Equations 4-39 to 4-42 give 0mmmmmrrmhqq (C-6) ,02mmmmmmmhBmrrqqmhqq PAGE 144 144 2 ,0,01 42mmmmKh mgg (C-7) 2 ,0,2,211112 42mmmmmmmmmBrrqqqq 3 ,1,1,3,333 96mmmmK (C-8) and ,1,1 111111 2mmmmmmmmmmBmrrqqmqqmqq 2 ,0,2,2,01 2 162mmmmmmK mgg (C-9) From Equation 4-43 and Equation 4-34, we obtain ,exp()0nmmn mnhrrE (C-10) and ,exp()0nmmn mnhqqE (C-11) Those six equations (Equations C-6 to C-11) can be furt her simplified by eliminating mr and mq from equation set. We take index n as a positive integer only in the analysis. Rewrite Equation C-11 as 1 exp()nnmm mqnhmIq n (C-12) and take the negative indices, 1 exp()nnmm mqnhmIq n (C-13) where the (n-m)th order modified Bessel function of first kind for argument -n nm I n has been written as nm I for simplification purpose. Similarly, nm I denotes the (n+m)th order modified Bessel function of first kind for argument n nm I n The same format is used from this point forward in this appendix. Equation C-10 is rewritten as 1 exp()nnmm mrnhmIr n (C-14) and 1 exp()nnmm mrnhmIr n (C-15) Change the dummy variable in E quation C-6 and Equation C-7 from m to n, and use the expressions in Equations C-12 to C-15 to eliminate nr nr nq and nq then we obtain 0 exp(2)exp(2)nmnm nmmnmm mmII mIrmhIq nhnh (C-16) PAGE 145 145 and 11 exp(2)exp(2)nmnm nmmnmm mmII mIrmhhIq nhnnhn exp()nnngg nh (C-17) Next, we multiply ()nm I n on both sides of Equation C-8, and take summation from m to m It yields 2 2n-211112 42nnnmnmmnmnmnmnmm mm I IIBIIrIIIIq 3 331133 96nnnnK IIII (C-18) A similar manipulation is applie d to Equation C-9, we have 11 1111() 2nnnmnmmnmnmnmnmnmnmm mm I IBmIIrIImIIIIq 2 221 2 162nnnnmnmmn mK I IImIIgI (C-19) Taking the zeroth order of Equations C-7, C-8, C-9 and C-11, we obtain 2 01 84Kh qBh (C-20) 2 0110 24rqqB (C-21) 2 0111 2164K qqq (C-22) and 00112qqqq (C-23) Equations C-16 to C-19, supplemented by Equations C-20 to C-23, are sufficient to solve the Fourier coefficient sets mr and mq Once they are solved, nq and nr are determined from Equation C-12 and Equation C-14; nq and nr are solved from Equation C-6 and Equation C-7, as 212nnnnnqnhqnrngg (C-24) and ()nnnnrhqqr (C-25) The zeroth term of mr and mq are obtained from Equation C-10 and Equation C-11 at 0 n namely, Equation C-23 and 00112rrrr (C-26) PAGE 146 146 In practical calculation, the in finite series in Equations C16 to C-19 are truncated to only N terms. Together with Equations C-20 to C-23, there are a total of 44N equations to solve for B 0q mr and mq mNN Subsequently, mr and mq are solved from Equations C-12, C-14, and C-23 to C-26. Finally, mr mr mq and mq are used to construct ()R and ()Q in Equation 4-37 and Equation 4-38, and they are used to solve for (,) x y in Equation 4-29. PAGE 147 147 LIST OF REFERENCES 1. R. P. Feynman, Microelectromechanical Systems, Journal of, 1992, 1, 60-66. 2. M. Gad-el-Hak, The MEMS Handbook, CRC Press, 2001. 3. P. S. Dittrich, K. Tachikawa and A. Manz, Editon edn., 2006, vol. 78, pp. 3887-3908. 4. S. A. Vittorio, MicroElectroMechanical Systems (MEMS), http://www.csa.com/discoveryguides/mems/overview.php 5. M. J. Madou, Fundamentals of microfabrication: the science of miniaturization, 2nd ed. edn., CRC Press LLC, Boca Raton, 2002. 6. W. Trimmer, A Tutorial on Micromechanics and MEMS, http://home.earthlink.net/~trimmerw/mems/tutorials.html Accessed 12/12, 2006. 7. R. Chan, MEMS market to double in five years, Databeans says, http://www.digitimes.com/bits_chips/a20061102PR204.html Accessed 12/12, 2006. 8. A. McWilliams, Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Technology: Current And Future Markets, http://www.electronics.ca/ reports/mems/technology.html 9. M. Born and E. Wolf, Principles of optics : electro magnetic theory of propagation, interference and diffraction of light 7th edn., Cambridge University Press, New York, 1999. 10. D. A. Agard, Y. Hiraoka, P. Shaw and J. W. Sedat, Method Cell Biol, 1989, 30, 353-377. 11. D. A. Agard and J. W. Sedat, Nature, 1983, 302, 676-681. 12. H. A. Stone and S. Kim, Aiche Journal, 2001, 47, 1250-1254. 13. H. A. Stone, A. D. Stroock and A. Ajdari, Annu Rev Fluid Mech, 2004, 36, 381-411. 14. R. F. Probstein, Physicochemical hydrodynamics : an introduction, 2nd edn., WileyInterscience, Hoboken, N.J., 2003. 15. E. W. Weisstein, Maxwell Distribution, http://mathworld.wolfram.com/MaxwellDistribution.html 16. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West and F. J. Holler, Fundamentals of anal ytical chemistry, 5th ed edn., Saunders College Pub, New York, 1988. 17. C. H. Amon, A. M. Guzman and B. Morel, Phys Fluids, 1996, 8, 1192-1206. 18. I. Glasgow and N. Aubry, Lab on a Chip, 2003, 3, 114-120. PAGE 148 148 19. A. D. Stroock, S. K. W. De rtinger, A. Ajdari, I. Mezic, H. A. Stone and G. M. Whitesides, Science, 2002, 295, 647-651. 20. T. J. Johnson, D. Ross and L. E. Locascio, Anal Chem, 2002, 74, 45-51. 21. M. Grumann, A. Geipel, L. Ri egger, R. Zengerle and J. Ducree, Lab on a Chip, 2005, 5, 560-565. 22. C. H. Lin, L. M. Fu and Y. S. Chien, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 5265-5272. 23. G. G. Yaralioglu, I. O. Wygant, T. C. Marentis and B. T. Khuri-Yakub, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 3694-3698. 24. J. B. Knight, A. Vishwanath, J. P. Brody and R. H. Austin, Physics Review Letter, 1998, 30, 38633866. 25. T. Rohr, C. Yu, M. H. Davey, F. Svec and J. M. J. Frechet, Electrophoresis, 2001, 22, 3959-3967. 26. T. Burghelea, E. Segre, I. Bar-J oseph, A. Groisman and V. Steinberg, Physical Review E, 2004, 69, -. 27. R. H. Liu, M. A. Stremler, K. V. Sharp, M. G. Olsen, J. G. Santiago, R. J. Adrian, H. Aref and D. J. Beebe, Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems, 2000, 9, 190-197. 28. F. Schonfeld, V. Hessel and C. Hofmann, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 65-69. 29. Y. C. Chung, Y. L. Hsu, C. P. Jen, M. C. Lu and Y. C. Lin, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 70-77. 30. A. O. El Moctar, N. Aubry and J. Batton, Lab on a Chip, 2003, 3, 273-280. 31. H. H. Bau, J. H. Zhong and M. Q. Yi, Sensors and Actuators B-Chemical, 2001, 79, 207215. 32. H. Suzuki, C. M. Ho and N. Kasagi, Journal of Microelect romechanical Systems, 2004, 13, 779-790. 33. A. P. Sudarsan and V. M. Ugaz, Lab on a Chip, 2006, 6, 74-82. 34. O. Kuksenok, J. M. Yeomans and A. C. Balazs, Physical Review E, 2002, 65, -. 35. E. Biddiss, D. Erickson and D. Li, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 3208-3213. 36. L. F. Greer and A. A. Szalay, Luminescence, 2002, 17, 43-74. 37. T. J. Johnson and L. E. Locascio, Lab Chip, 2002, 2, 135-140. 38. R. J. Adrian, Experiments in Fluids, 2005, 39, 159-169. PAGE 149 149 39. D. Sinton, Microfluidics and Nanofluidics, 2004, 1, 2-21. 40. Y. N. Xia and G. M. Whitesides, Annual Review of Materials Science, 1998, 28, 153-184. 41. D. C. Duffy, J. C. McDonald, O. J. A. Schueller and G. M. Whitesides, Anal Chem, 1998, 70, 4974-4984. 42. C. E. Walker, Z. Xia, Z. S. Foster, B. J. Lutz and Z. H. Fan, Electroanalysis, 2008, 20, 663-670. 43. TOPAS COC A clearly extraordinary polymer, http://www.topas.com/productstopas_coc 44. J. G. Santiago, S. T. Wereley, C. D. Meinhart, D. J. Beebe and R. J. Adrian, Experiments in Fluids, 1998, 25, 316-319. 45. S. Devasenathipathy, J. G. Santiago, S. T. Wereley, C. D. Meinhart and K. Takehara, Experiments in Fluids, 2003, 34, 504-514. 46. I. Glasgow, S. Lieber and N. Aubry, Anal Chem, 2004, 76, 4825-4832. 47. C. H. Chen, H. Lin, S. K. Lele and J. G. Santiago, J Fluid Mech, 2005, 524, 263-303. 48. B. He, B. J. Burke, X. Zhang, R. Zhang and F. E. Regnier, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 19421947. 49. S. K. Yoon, M. Mitchell, E. R. Choban and P. J. Kenis, Lab Chip, 2005, 5, 1259-1263. 50. R. F. Ismagilov, A. D. Stroock, P. J. A. Kenis, G. Whitesides and H. A. Stone, Appl Phys Lett, 2000, 76, 2376-2378. 51. J. I. Molho, A. E. Herr, B. P. Mosier, J. G. Santiago, T. W. Kenny, R. A. Brennen, G. B. Gordon and B. Mohammadi, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 1350-1360. 52. Y. Wang, Q. Lin and T. Mukherjee, Lab Chip, 2004, 4, 453-463. 53. S. V. Ermakov, S. C. Jacobson and J. M. Ramsey, Anal Chem, 1998, 70, 4494-4504. 54. L. L. Shultz-Lockyear, C. L. Colyer, Z. H. Fan, K. I. Roy and D. J. Harrison, Electrophoresis, 1999, 20, 529-538. 55. M. S. Munson and P. Yager, Anal Chim Acta, 2004, 507, 63-71. 56. D. S. Kim, S. H. Lee, T. H. Kwon and C. H. Ahn, Lab Chip, 2005, 5, 739-747. 57. C. Neils, Z. Tyree, B. Finlayson and A. Folch, Lab on a Chip, 2004, 4, 342-350. 58. D. Therriault, S. R. White and J. A. Lewis, Nat Mater, 2003, 2, 265-271. PAGE 150 150 59. J. G. McNally, T. Karpova, J. Cooper and J. A. Conchello, Methods, 1999, 19, 373-385. 60. J. B. Sibarita, Adv Biochem Eng Biot, 2005, 95, 201-243. 61. S. F. Gibson and F. Lanni, Journal of Optical Society of America, 1991, 8, 1601-1613. 62. A. V. Oppenheim and R. W. Schafer, Digital signal processing, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1975. 63. R. S. Figliola and D. E. Beasley, Theory and Design for Mechanical Measurements, 3rd edn., John Willey & Sons, New York, 2000. 64. J. D. Ingle and S. R. Crouch, Spectrochemical analysis, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1988. 65. C. R. Chatwin and R. K. Wang, Frequency Domain Filtering Strategies for Hybrid Optical Information Processing, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1996. 66. P. A. Jansson, R. H. Hunt and E. K. Plyler, J Opt Soc Am, 1970, 60, 596-&. 67. R. Gold, An iterative unfolding method for matrices ANL6984, Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, Ill, 1964. 68. W. H. Richardson, J Opt Soc Am, 1972, 62, 55-59. 69. L. B. Lucy, Astron J, 1974, 79, 745-754. 70. T. J. Holmes, Journal of the Optical Society of America A, 1992, 9, 1052-1061. 71. D. J. Harrison, A. Manz, Z. H. Fan, H. Ludi and H. M. Widmer, Anal Chem, 1992, 64, 1926-1932. 72. F. M. White, Viscous Fluid Flow, 2nd edn., McGraw-Hill, 1991. 73. N. A. Patankar and H. H. Hu, Anal Chem, 1998, 70, 1870-1881. 74. F. Bianchi, A. Ferrigno and H. H. Girault, Anal Chem, 2000, 72, 1987-1993. 75. S. Bhattacharyya, Z. Zheng and A. T. Conlisk, J Fluid Mech, 2005, 540, 247-267. 76. X. C. Xuan and D. Q. Li, Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, 2005, 289, 291-303. 77. A. Ajdari, Physical Review Letters, 1995, 75, 755-758. 78. S. Ghosal, J Fluid Mech, 2002, 459, 103-128. 79. R. Qiao and N. R. Aluru, J Micromech Microeng, 2002, 12, 625-635. PAGE 151 151 80. E. B. Cummings, S. K. Griffith s, R. H. Nilson and P. H. Paul, Anal Chem, 2000, 72, 25262532. 81. S. K. Griffiths and R. H. Nilson, Anal Chem, 2000, 72, 4767-4777. 82. H. SalimiMoosavi, T. Tang and D. J. Harrison, Journal of the Americ an Chemical Society, 1997, 119, 8716-8717. 83. S. C. Jacobson, R. Hergenroder, L. B. Koutny, R. J. Warmack and J. M. Ramsey, Anal Chem, 1994, 66, 1107-1113. 84. J. C. Burns and T. Parkes, J Fluid Mech, 1967, 29, 731-743. 85. J. C. F. Chow and K. Soda, Phys Fluids, 1972, 15, 1700-&. 86. C. Y. Wang, Phys Fluids, 1978, 21, 697-698. 87. C. Y. Wang, Phys Fluids, 2003, 15, 1114-1121. 88. I. J. Sobey, J Fluid Mech, 1980, 96, 1-26. 89. K. D. Stephanoff, I. J. Sobey and B. J. Bellhouse, J Fluid Mech, 1980, 96, 27-&. 90. S. Tsangaris and E. Leiter, Journal of Engineering Mathematics, 1984, 18, 89-103. 91. C. Pozrikidis, J Fluid Mech, 1987, 180, 495-514. 92. C. Pozrikidis, J Fluid Mech, 1988, 188, 275-300. 93. H. Luo and C. Pozrikidis, J Fluid Mech, 2006, 556, 167-188. 94. M. Hemmat and A. Borhan, Phys Fluids, 1995, 7, 2111-2121. 95. G. Leneweit and D. Auerbach, J Fluid Mech, 1999, 387, 129-150. 96. M. Scholle, Arch Appl Mech, 2004, 73, 823-840. 97. A. E. Malevich, V. V. Mityushev and P. M. Adler, Acta Mech, 2006, 182, 151-182. 98. H. H. Wei, S. L. Waters, S. Q. Liu and J. B. Grotberg, J Fluid Mech, 2003, 492, 23-45. 99. H. Zhou, R. J. Martinuzzi, R. E. Khay at, A. G. Straatman and E. Abu-Ramadan, Phys Fluids, 2003, 15, 3114-3133. 100. J. G. Santiago, Anal Chem, 2001, 73, 2353-2365. 101. E. Lauga, A. D. Stroock and H. A. Stone, Phys Fluids, 2004, 16, 3051-3062. PAGE 152 152 102. A. D. Polianin, Handbook of linear partial differ ential equations for engineers and scientists, Chapman & Hall/CRC, Boca Raton, 2002. 103. B. P. Palka, An introduction to complex function theory, Springer-Verlag, New York 1991. 104. H. K. Moffatt, J Fluid Mech, 1964, 18, 1-18. 105. S. Y. Park, C. J. Russo, D. Branton and H. A. Stone, Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, 2006, 297, 832-839. 106. M. Gu, Advanced Optical Imaging Theory, Springer, Berlin, 1999. PAGE 153 153 BIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH Zheng Xia was born in 1978 in Luoyang, China. He spent his childhood with his family in this ancient city in Ch ina, until he moved to Beijing to embark on his college life in 1996. After 4 years study, Zheng Xia earned his B. E. degree in mechanic al engineering from Tsinghua University, the most pr estigious university in China. He then came to the United States to continue his graduate study at the University of Ce ntral Florida (UCF) in Orlando, Florida. Shortly after he received the M.Sc. degree in mechanical engineering from UCF in 2003, he attended graduate school at the University of Florida. While taking classes, he worked as a Research Assistant at the BioMEMS and Micr ofluidics lab of the UF for Dr. Z. Hugh Fan. He quite enjoyed the time spent in clean room, fabricating microfluidic devices on silicon, glass and plastic substrates. His research has been focused on micro scale fluid mechanics, microfluidic design and fa brication, and BioMEMS. In 2004, his first year of PhD study at the Univ ersity of Florida, he met Xinyi Wang, a PhD student of the College of Medicine who later b ecame his wife in 2007. The couple welcomed the birth of their first son, Chase, in May 2008. Upon completion of his PhD program, Zheng Xia works shortly for Invitrogen Corp, a biotech comp any at Carlsbad, California, participating in a research project on micro-me so fluidic integration. |